You are on page 1of 338

Preface

Great Wall Pickup has a good reputation at home and abroad for the following advantages: good
comfortability, high practicability, complete function and reasonable performance/price ratio . In order to
meet the demand of market, Great Wall company offers second-generation product of Great Wall Pickup:
K2 series Pickup automobile. With novel design and elegant appearance, this automobile applies
turbocharging control direct injection diesel and has the following features: large torque, low fuel
consumption, long service life and perfect reliability etc. In order to meet the demand of most Great Wall
after-sale service technical personnel, we compile this service manual.

Service maintenance and repair information contained in this manual is provided for qualified profes-
sional technical personnel. Maintaining and repairing in the case of personnel without regular training or
not using correct tools and devices will injure the personnel himself/herself and others. Meanwhile, it is
possible to cause vehicle damage and unsafe state. Therefore, correct service and maintenance is
very important to customer safety and vehicle reliability.In order to help you make a wise decision,
corresponding safe information or other safe instructions are given in this manual, which is throughout
the manual. Despite all this, we still could not give corresponding warnings to all dangers in service and
repair. You must make use of your correct judgement. Some most important after-sale service safety
preventive measures are given in the following:

1. Ensure that you have a clear understanding on the common sense of safety in all basic service
shops, wear corresponding protective clothing and use safe device. In taking any service, it is
especially necessary to note the following items:

(a) Before starting, read all the safe instructions, ensure that you have well prepared correct tools,
replacing or repairing parts and have required skills to finish the task safely and thoroughly.
(b) In pounding, drilling, grinding operation or working around pressure air, fluid, spring and other
energy accumulating parts, wear safety glasses, safety goggles or face shield to protect eyes.
In any other cases, as long as you are not sure, you must use eye protective device.

(c) Use other safety appliances such as gloves or safety boots if necessary.Moving hot or sharp
parts will cause severe burn or cut, so wear gloves before holding any object that seems to
cause injury.

(d) When lifting vehicles, you must protect yourself and others. Use crane or jack to lift vehicles
and use supporting rack to ensure the vehicles get reliable support.

2. Unless otherwise specified, before starting any maintenance, ensure the engine has flamed out
which can prevent the following dangers:

(a) Engine exhaust gas will cause carbon monoxide intoxication. Ensure perfect ventilation when
starting the engine.

(b) Hot parts or refrigerant burn. Before working near engine and exhaust system area, let the
engine and exhaust system cool down .

(c) Injury caused by rotating parts. When rotating the engine as required, ensure your hands,
fingers and clothes are far away from the rotating parts.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


We get great support and help from professionals in compiling this manual, so we would like to express
our sincere thanks to them here.

We apply the same iconography for similar models in this manual, so the information provided in this
manual may slightly vary from real model.Although we try our best to compile this manual carefully, we
still could not assure all contents are correct .Users are not allowed to bring forward any requirement to
Great Wall company depending on this manual, and we shall not bear any liability for the loss caused by
using this manual.Defects and mistakes are inevitable in this manual for limited level of compiler, we
sincerely expect you to criticize and correct.

Great Wall Motor Co., Ltd has the final explanation right to this manual.

Compiler

June 2006

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Chassis and vehicle body
Service manual

Overview IN
Vehicle parameters PA
Fuel supply system and exhaust system FE
Clutch CL
Transmission MT
Transfer case TF
Drive shaft PR
Suspension system and axle SA
Braking system BR
Steering system SR
Vehicle body electrical equipment system BE
Air conditioning system AC
Vehicle body BO

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


OV-1

Overview
Page

How to use this manual................................................... OV-2


Identification number position ....................................... OV-3
Integrated repair instruction .......................................... OV-4
OV

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 ÿwww.fineprint.com.cn


OV-2 Overview — How to use this manual

How to use this manual


In order to help you find the contents of this manual more easily,
chapter name and main title are given on the top of each page.
In order to introduce maintenance items for you, index is given on
the first page of each chap ter.
Cautions for all repair operation related to this chapter are also
given at the beginning of each chapter.
Please read these cautions first before starting repair operation.
The trouble diagnosis table of each system can help you diagnose
system trouble and find out source of trouble.
The repair methods aimed at possible reasons are given in repair
methods column, which can help you get solutions as soon as
possible.
Repair procedures
Most of repair operation can be started through referring to
iconography. These iconographies help you identify parts and in-
dicate their matching with each other.
For example:

Front reducer assembly

Washer

Bearing
◆ Oil seal
Spacer-drive bevel gear

N ·m :Specified torque
Front reducer main gear flange 140-160 ◆
◆ Parts no longer for use after service and dust shield assembly

Explain the repair procedures step by step:


● Iconography indicates what to do and where to do it.
● The title of repair operation tells you what to do.
● Detailed instructions tell you how to finish repair work and
introduce other relevant items such as specification and warning
etc.
Operation title: what to do
For example:
2. Measuring radial clearance of intermediate shaft 5th gear
(a) Mount spacer, needle bearing and reverse idler gear on
the intermediate shaft.
(b) Measure the radial clearance of reverse idler gear with
dial gauge.
Radial clearance: (0.009-0.32)mm
Iconography: what to do and where to do it
Specification Detailed instruction: how to do it

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Overview — Identification number position OV-3

This format can help experienced technical personnel quickly find


out the source of trouble. Repair personnel can browse operation
title and refer to the detailed instructions under it if necessary.
Important specification and warning are written with boldface.
Specification
In the whole manual, the corresponding specification is given with
boldface for each repair step, so you do not need to stop repair
work and see the specification.
Warning, note, remark
● Warning is written with boldface indicating the possibility of
injuring yourself or other persons.
● Note is written with boldface indicating the possibility of
damaging parts under repair.
● Remark is written in the instruction separately but not with
boldface. It is mainly some additional instructions to help you
finish work more effectively.

Identification number position


Vehicle identification number
Vehicle identification number (VIN) is unique number with 17 digits
representing vehicle identification, and this number is also engraved
on the outer right side of the frame right side member and VIN
nameplate of upper left instrument panel besides being present in
VIN nameplate vehicle certificate.

Certificate plate

Frame number (VIN)

Engine number
Engine number is engraved on the left side of the engine cylinder
Engine number body.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


OV-4 Overview — Integrated repair instruction

Integrated repair instruction


● Protect all the paint coating and seats with clean cloth and
polythene to prevent dust and scratches.
● Concentrate yourself and be careful in working. After lifting
front and rear wheels, wedge the wheels not lifted reliably. If
two or more persons work together, communicate with each
other as much as possible. Do not let the engine rotate unless
workshop or operational area is in perfect ventilation.

● Before removing or disassembling parts, inspect them carefully


to isolate the parts needing repair. Please observe all the safety
instructions and preventive measures given in this manual and
operate as correct steps.

● Mark all the parts taken down or put them on the parts rack in
order so as to reassemble them completely as original order.

● When needing tools, use the special tools as required.

● Assemble parts as the regulations in maintenance standard with


correct tightening torque.
● When tightening a group of bolts or nuts, start from center
bolt or diameter bolt, and finish them in two or more steps in
cross way.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Overview — Integrated repair instruction OV-5

● Parts no longer for use after service


(a) When reassembling parts, use new packing, gasket, O
seal ring and cotter pin.
(b) Parts no longer for use after service are marked with “
◆ ” symbol in part drawing.
● Do not continue using old parts needing replacement and it is
required to change them.

● Use parts and lubricants produced by original factory. When


continue using parts, inspect them carefully and ensure there
is no damage or deterioration and the parts are in perfect service
status.

● Specified grease should be applied on or filled into the parts as


required. When removing the parts, clean all of them with
solvent.

● Precoat parts
Locking sealant Precoat parts are bolts and nuts, and they are coated with
locking sealant in the factory.
(a) If precoat parts are tightened, loosened or moved for a
certain reason, coat them again with specified sealant.
(b) Coating steps for precoat parts
1) Clean off the old sealant from the thread of this part.
2) Blow them dry with compressed air.
3) Coat specified locking sealant on the part thread.
(c) Precoat parts are marked with “ ★ ” symbol in part
drawing.
● Disassembling and assembling of vacuum hose
(a) To disconnect vacuum hose, hold the hose end and pull
it out by twisting. Do not hold the middle hose and pull
forcibly, because this will damage the hose.

Wrong Correct

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


OV-6 Overview — Integrated repair instruction

(b) In order to facilitate reassembling the hose, add labels in


disconnecting to help recognize.
(c) Inspect carefully after finishing the work to ensure the
vacuum hose is connected correctly.
(d) When using vacuum gauge, do not connect the hose to
oversized joint compulsively. Adjust the joint size
gradually, and note that there will be leakage once the
hose is tensed.

● Disassemble the hose clip


(a) Before removing the hose, check the clip position to reset
correctly.
(b) Replace the deformed or dented clip.
(c) When using the clip repeatedly, lock the clip at dented
position.
(d) As to spring clip, gently pull the spring leaf to tighten the
spring clip as the arrow direction after assembling.

● Brake fluid and hydraulic element


(a) When applying fluid to the system, be extremely careful
to prevent dust or contaminant entering into system.
(b) It is forbidden to mix fluid of different brands, because
they may not be solved with each other.
(c) Do not reusing emitted brake oil.
(d) For brake oil may damage paint coat or resin surface, be
extremely careful not to let the brake oil spatter on these
surfaces, and immediately wash with water or warm
water if the brake oil spatters. After disconnecting brake
hose and brake pipe, block the opening to ensure there is
no loss with the brake oil.
(e) Clean all the parts taken down with clean brake oil and
blow all the holes and passes with compressed air.
(f) Avoid the parts taken down contacting with dust and
friction matters brought by the air.
(g) Before assembling parts, inspect and confirm they are
clean.
(h) Avoid smearing oil or grease on rubber parts or pipelines,
unless otherwise specified.
(i) When assembling, check each part is correctly installed
and in normal operation.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Overview — Integrated repair instruction OV-7

Trouble shooting instruction on electrical


equipment malfunction
● Before trouble shooting
(a) Check corresponding fuse/fuse in the relay box.
(b) Check charging status of the battery, whether the battery
is damaged, and clean, and tighten the connector.
Note:
(a) Do not perform quick charge to the battery if the
battery ground cable is not cut, or the diode of
alternator will be damaged.
Wrong
(b) Do not try to start the engine in the case of the
battery ground cable being loosely connected, or the
Wrong wiring will be seriously damaged.
(c) Check the alternator belt tension.
● Basic operation
Correct 1. Dismounting of harness joint
(a) When disconnecting the joint, squeeze both ends of the
joint with hands at first to loosen the lock and then press
the lock claw to release the joint.
(b) When disconnecting the joint, do not pull the harness,
directly hold the joint and disconnect it.
Loosening the coiling
(c) Before connecting the joint, check it is deformed,
Core of conductor damaged and port lost.
(d) When connecting the joint, crack sound indicates
successful connection.
Terminal 2. Inspection of harness joint
deformation
(a) Inspection for joint connected
Gently pulling Squeeze both ends of the joint to ensure the joint is safely
inserted and tightly locked.
(b) Inspection for joint disconnected
Inspect by gently pulling the harness from the joint back.
Find the terminal not meshed or fallen off, loosened clip
or broken lead.
Visually check there is corrosion, metal chips, impurities
and water, bending, rust, overheating, contamination or
terminal deformed etc.
(c) Inspecting the terminal contact pressure:
Prepare a male contact matching the joint port, and insert
Terminal like male contact
it into the socket, and then check they are in good tension
status in inserting and after complete mesh.

3. Repair method of harness joint terminal


Wrong
(a) If there is dust on the terminal, clean the contact with air
Correct
gun or duster cloth.Do not wipe with tissue paper, because
this will damage galvanized coating.
(b) If the contact pressure is not normal, replace the same
class socket.
(c) Broken, deformed or eroded terminal should be replaced.
If the terminal is not locked in the housing, the housing
also needs replacing.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


OV-8 Overview — Integrated repair instruction

4. Dismounting of the harness


Wrong Wrong
(a) When dismounting the harness, check the wiring and
tightening of the harness before operating to reassemble
the parts correctly.
(b) It is absolutely forbidden to distort, extend or loosen the
harness.
(c) Do not let the harness contact with high-temperature,
Wrong rotating, vibrating or sharp-angled parts. Avoid contacting
the panel edge, screw tip or other similar articles.
(d) When installing parts, do not mix the harness with the
parts.
(e) Do not use the lead or harness whose insulating layer is
cracked.If it is cracked, replace it or wind the cracked
part with electric adhesive tape.
(f) After installing the parts, ensure no lead is locked under
the parts.
(g) If possible, insert the tester probe from lead side (except
waterproof connector).Use the probe with gimlet-point.
Note: piercing the lead insulating layer will result in poor
electrical connection or intermittent electrical connection
fault.
Five-step troubleshooting method
1. Fault check
Connect the power supply of all elements in faulted circuit to
check the fault description of customers, and pay attention to
symptoms.Before confirming the fault position, do not
dismount or test.
2. Principle analysis
Check the circuit diagram to confirm the faulted circuit. Check
all components along the current path from power supply to
ground connection and confirm the operating principle of this
circuit in this way. If there is trouble with several circuits at
the same time, the trouble is likely to be caused by fuse or
grounding.Recognize one or more reasons of the trouble based
on the symptoms and understanding of the circuit operating
principle.
3. Isolate the trouble by circuit test
Test the circuit to check the diagnosis in step 2.Remember
that clear and simple step is the key to eliminate trouble
effectively. Test the circuit that is most likely to cause the
trouble and start testing from the points easy to approach.
4. Troubleshooting
Once the fault is recognized, repair it immediately.In repairing,
use correct tools and follow safe operational procedure.
5. Confirm normal operation of the circuit
Under all operating modes, connect all components in the loop
that has been repaired, and confirm the whole trouble has
been eliminated.If the fault is the break of fuse, test all the
circuits connected to this fuse. Ensure that no new fault
appears and the former trouble no longer occurs.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Overview — Integrated repair instruction OV-9

● Assembling and disassembling of the clip


The method to assemble and disassemble vehicle body parts is shown as the table below.
Remark: if this clip is damaged during operating, replace new clip.
Shape Disassembling/assembling

Jaw vice

Clip detacher

Protect tape

Screwdriver

Protect tape

Screwdriver

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


OV-10

Continued table:
Shape Disassembling/assembling

Disassembling assembling

Screwdriver
Pressing

Clip detacher

Push out the king pin and remove it, and prize off the king pin bush.

Disassembling assembling

Screwdriver Pressing

Clip detacher

Screw off the king pin and prize off the king pin bush.

Disassembling assembling

Pressing

Screwdriver

Clip detacher

Small clip detacher


Prize out the king pin and remove the rivet, and then prize off the king pin
bush.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


PA-1

Complete Vehicle parameters


page
Complete vehicle type ................................................................ PA-2
Complete vehicle basic parameters ........................................... PA-3
Dimension and weight parameters ......................................... PA-3
Complete vehicle basic performance parameters .................. PA-4
Structure and performance parameters of main assembly PA-6
Vehicle body dimension schematic diagram .............................. PA-7 PA

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 ÿwww.fineprint.com.cn


PA-2 Complete vehicle parameters page — Complete vehicle type/Complete vehicle basic parameters

Complete vehicle type


Two wheels drive Four wheels drive Two wheels drive
Left rudder Right rudder Left rudder Right rudder Left rudder Right rudder
CC1031PS40 CC1031PS50 CC1031PS60 CC1031PS70 CC1031PS41 CC1031PS51

Complete vehicle basic parameters


Dimension and weight parameters
Type code CC1031PS40 CC1031PS60 CC1031PS41
Drive type 4×2 4×4 4×2
Length mm 5040 5040 5040
Overall
Width mm 1800 1800 1720
dimension
Height (no load) mm 1730 1730 1675
Wheel base (mm) 3050 3050 3050
Front mm 1515 1515 1460
Wheel track
Rear mm 1525 1525 1460
Front suspension mm 745 745 745
Rear suspension mm 1245 1245 1245
Length mm 1380 1380 1380
Trunk
inside Width mm 1460 1460 1460
dimension
Height mm 480 480 480
Curb weight kg 1775 1920 1705
Front axle load kg 975 1090 945
Rear axle load kg 800 830 760
Mass
Weight with full load kg 2580 2725 2510
parameter
Front axle load kg 1050 1165 1020
Rear axle load kg 1530 1560 1490
Load weight kg 480 480 480
Toe in (mm) 0~2 0~2 0±2

Wheel Front wheel camber 0°±30′ 0°±30′ 0°±30′


alignment 30 ′ 30 ′
Kingpin rear inclination 3°30′0 ′ 3°30′0 ′ 3°35′±45′
parameter
(no load) Kingpin inclination angle 12°30′±30′ 12°30′±30′ 12°30′±30′
Inner/outer wheel max.
≥32°/28° ≥32°/28° 37°6′/33°30′
steering angle

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Complete vehicle parameters page — Complete vehicle basic parameters PA-3

Complete vehicle basic performance parameters


Type code CC1031PS40 CC1031PS60 CC1031PS41
Engine model GW2.8TC-2
Delivery capacity(L) 2.771
Rated power / rotating speed(kw/rpm) 70/3600
Max. torque / rotating speed (Nm/rpm) 225/1800~2000
Max. vehicle speed (Km/h) ≥140
Accelerating time (0~100km/h) (sec) full load 28
Max. climbing speed(%) ≥30
Service braking distance with initial speed of braking of
≤22( full load),≤21( no load)
50km/h(m)
Emergency braking distance with initial speed of braking
≤20
of 30km/h(m)
Parking brake (with grade slope 20%) Not less than 5min
Noise dB (A) emitted by accelerating motor vehicles ≤78
Emission level EuroⅡ
Approach angle (no load) ≥30° ≥24°
Angle of departure (no load) ≥24° ≥21°
Steering ability data Min. ground clearance (full load)
194
(mm)
Min. turning diameter(m) ≤13
Perfect start performance in the environment above -
Engine startup performance
35℃
Structure and performance parameters of main assembly
Engine characteristic parameters
Items Structure parameters
Engine model GW2.8TC-2
4-cylinder, in-line, water-cooling, four-stoke, turbo-charging electric
Engine type
control direct injection diesel
Delivery capacity(L) 2.771
Bore × stroke(mm) 93×102
Rated power / rotating speed(kw/rpm) 70/3600
Max. torque / rotating speed (Nm/rpm) 225/1800~2000
Min. stable idle speed (r/min) 800±50
Compression ratio 17.5:1
Overall dimension(mm) 775×620×761
intake system Air filter, exhaust gas turbo-charging system

Fuel supply Fuel tank Plastic fuel tank: 70L


system Fuel supply control Electric control
Exhaust system First class silencer
Cooling system Closed and forced water-cooling system, electronic fan
Engine layout form Parallel, three-point mounting

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


PA-4 Complete vehicle parameters page — Complete vehicle basic parameters

Main assembly structure and parameters of chassis


Type code CC1031PS40 CC1031PS60 CC1031PS41
Type Single dry diaphragm spring
Outside diameter of
Clutch 250
friction disc(mm)
Manipulate Hydraulic control
Type Mechanical, 5-forward gear
Center distance (mm) 72
Max. input torque (N.m) ≥230
Net weight(Kg) 35
Odometer speed ratio 17/6
Lubricant type Gear oil 80W/90 (GL-4)
Lubricant amount( L) 2.4
Transmissi st
1 gear 3.992
on
nd
2 gear 2.15
rd
3 gear 1.334
th
4 gear 1
Speed ratio th
5 gear 0.806
R gear 4.22
H gear 1
L gear 2.48
Main reducer speed ratio 4.1 3.9
Front: double spiders
Type Three spider types Three spider types
Rear: three spiders
Drive shaft
Pipe diameter×wall Front: Ф63×2.5,
Ф76×1.8 Ф76×1.8
thickness(mm) Rear: Ф76×1.8
Front axle Non-whole axle
Rear axle Whole axle
Tire type Tubeless radial tire
Wheel and Tire specification P235/70R16 P215/75R15
tire Felloe specification 16×7J 15×6J
Tire pressure (F/R)(KPa) 220/250
Double wishbone torsional bar spring independent Coiled spring
Front
Suspension suspension independent suspension
Rear Leaf spring non-independent suspension

Steering Steering gear type Hydraulic power rack-and-pinion


system Steering column Adjustable or unadjustable Adjustable
Hydraulic double pipeline, with vacuum booster; loading sensing pressure
Structure type
Braking proportoining valve, optional anti-lock brake system (ABS)
system Service brake Front disc brake, rear drum brake
Parking brake Drum brake

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Complete vehicle parameters page — Complete vehicle basic parameters PA-5

Vehicle body structure type


Assembly Structure parameters
Vehicle body type Body-chassis frame construction, double seats
White vehicle body All-metal closed structure
Push, four doors open, panel door lock, hinge, central control door lock,
Vehicle Door assembly
electric window regulator
body
Backward opening, hinge with dead axle rotating, sealing with front and
Engine hood
rear weatherstrips, adding heat insulating mattress
Front, rear bumper PP injection molding, connected with body frame using clips and bolts
Body-chassis frame trunk, suspension connected with body equipped with
Trunk Trunk type
cushion, equipped with rear door opening and locking structure
Original inner door panel design, softening ceiling design and softening
nterior trim
carpet
Instrument panel Injection molding, main material with PP, frame with sheetmetal structure
A, B, C column and inner Injection molding, inner door penal with sundries box and partially
door panel softened, main material with PP
Roof door handle Nylon injection molding
Front windshield with double curved laminated glass, rear windshield with
Interior, Windshield
tempered glass
exterior Outer rear-view mirror: two types of electric and manual, optional
trim Rear view mirror
Interior rear-view mirror: manual glare-proof flat-view interior mirror
Seat position adjusted manually front and rear (travel 200), backrest angle
Driver's seat
adjusted manually.
Seat Seat position adjusted manually front and rear (travel 200), backrest angle
Co-driver's seat
adjusted manually.
Rear seat The rear with integrated seat, backrest overturned to folding
Door handle Outer pull door handle
Vehicle Seat belt Three-point emergency locking seat belt
body
Wiper system Electric crank-rocker mechanism
accessorie
s Sun visor PVC leather surface, rotation gear self-locking device
Structure type Refrigerating and heating manually
Refrigerating and heating
Not less than 4000W when the rotating speed of engine is 1800rpm
capacity
Control mechanism Mechanical
Refrigerant R134A
Compressor type JSS-D14
Refrigerati Air purification system With rough filtration
ng and HVAC With (separate)
heating air
Condenser Advection
conditionin
g system Dry reservoir With
Air duct With
Ventilation port With
Refrigerating pipe Low and high pressure tube, hose
Heating pipe Rubber tube
Sensor Evaporator temperature sensor
Pressure switch With (three-state switch)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


PA-6 Complete vehicle parameters page — Complete vehicle basic parameters

Electrical system structure and parameters


System Structure parameters
Circuit Single wire, cathode earth, DC voltage 12V
Generator 90A, with vacuum pump, built-in regulator
Power supply,
startup and Starter 12V,2.8KW
charging system
Air conditioning system 2-speed
Battery 90Ah
Combination meter Electronic
Instrument
Indicator light LED
system
Sensor and light regulating switch Attached relevant system
Audio device CD player, tape player
Cigarette lighter With
Rear window defrost With
Auxiliary
Central control lock With
electrical system
Window regulator With electric, manual
ABS electrical control system With (optional)
Safe airbag With (optional)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Complete vehicle parameters page — Vehicle body dimension schematic diagram PA-7

Vehicle body dimension schematic diagram


(Two-dimensional distance size)

Unit:mm
(Full load)

Note: after mounting rear bumper, vehicle overall length is 5040mm, angle of departure is 21°.
(Interior height of trunk)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


PA-8 Complete vehicle parameters page — Vehicle body dimension schematic diagram

(Two-dimensional distance size)

Unit:mm
W heel base: 3050mm

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


FE-1

Fuel supply system and exhaust


system
Page

Fuel supply system:


Trouble shooting ......................................................... FE-2
Fuel supply system ..................................................... FE-3
Removal of fuel tank and supporting plate ................... FE-4
Removal of oil filler assembly ...................................... FE-5
Removal of fuel sensor assembly bracket .................. FE-5
Exhaust of fuel supply system ..................................... FE-6
Replacement of fuel filter element ............................... FE-6
Exhaust system:
Exhaust system .......................................................... FE-7
Removal of exhaust pipe assembly ............................. FE-8
Installation of exhaust pipe assembly .......................... FE-9

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


FE-2 Fuel supply system and exhaust system—Trouble shooting

Trouble shooting
Trouble Causes Countermeasures
Engine does not start after Air in the system Loosen the air bleed bolt of the fuel filter and
disassembling and assembling continuously press the hand fuel pump manually to
of fuel supply system discharge air
Engine does not start Too many impurities Clean the fuel line system
in the fuel line, poor
fuel quality
Fuel gauge pointer is not The pointer of the Instrument:
accurate instrumentisblocked
Fuel float vibration Fuel sensor bracket assembly
affects the contact

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Fuel supply system and exhaust system — Fuel supply system FE-3

Fuel supply system


Part drawing

Accelerator pedal bracket


M6 bolt

9-12
M6 nut

★ Fuel pump gland


Accelerator pedal

100

Fuel sensor bracket as-


Oil filler assembly
Fuel tank cap sembly
steel wire elastic hoop

Fuel filling ventilation ★ Fuel tank oil return pipe assembly


rubber hose
Fuel tank front bandage
★ Fuel tank oil outlet pipe
C ross recessed screw assembly

M10 bolt
◆ Fuel pump seal ring
M10 bolt 65-75

65-75

★ Engine oil return rubber hose


Fuel tank assembly

Fuel hose clip


★ Engine oil inlet rubber hose
Fuel tank support plate
C type worm gear driving
Fuel tank rear bandage hose hoop

M10 bolt Fuel filter


5-line fuel pipe clip holder
Fuel filter bracket

★ Fuel filter oil inlet rubber hose


Fuel tank oil return tube

Fuel tank oil outlet tube Steel wire elastic hoop

N ·m :Specified torque

◆ Parts no longer for use after service


★ Precoat parts

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


FE-4 Fuel supply system and exhaust system — Removal of fuel tank and supporting plate

Removal of fuel tank and supporting plate


Note: When repairing the fuel supply system, remove
the oil line and release the pressure of the fuel system
to prevent the injection of high-pressure fuel.
1. Remove the screw (Q2214216A) at oil filler.

2. Remove the elastic hoop of tube and hose, and


disconnect the tube and hose.

3. R em ove the fueltank frontbandage.Firstly remove the


fixing bolts on the crossrail with another end of the
bandage hung on the T opening of the frame, and move
the bandage downwards and the bandage could be
taken out from the T opening.

4. Remove the fuel tank rear bandage, then remove the


fixing bolt M10 with another end of the bandage fixed on
the frame, and move the bandage upwards and the
bandage could be taken out from the groove.

5. Move the fuel tank downwards, then remove the oil filler
rubber hose and the connecting hoop b etween
ventilation rubber hose and fuel tank, and remove the
fuel sensor harness joint on the fuel tank, and the fuel
tank could be taken down

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Fuel supply system and exhaust system —Removal of oil filler assembly FE-5

Removal of oil filler assembly


1. Remove bolt Q2214216A fixed in the body with cross
screwdriver.

2. Take down the fuel tank opening cable

3. Remove the left rear wheel fender shield

4. Remove the hoops at two points connected with fuel


tank with M6 wrench, and remove the oil filler rubber
hose and fuel filling ventilation rubber hose

5. Remove the oil filler assembly along with the ventilation


rubber hose

Removal of fuel sensor assembly


bracket
1. Remove the fuel tank and clean the deposit contaminant
around the fuel pump gland

2. Loosen the fuel pump gland with SST


Mount the tightening torque: (70 ± 5)N·m
Remark : SST----Special Service Tools.

3. Take out the fuel sensor bracket assembly and take


care not to damage the fuel sensor

4. Remove the fuel pump seal ring and cast it aside

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


FE-6 Fuel supply system and exhaust system — Replacement of fuel filter element

Exhaust of fuel supply system


Loosen the air bleed bolt of the fuel filter with No.10 wrench
and press the hand fuel pump upwards and downwards until
the fuel coming from the bolt has no air bubble.

Replacement of fuel filter element


Firstly remove the rubber hose connected with both ends of
the fuel filter, and pull out the water level harness connector
at the bottom of the fuel filter, and then take out two M10
bolts, and take down the fuel filter, screw out the filter element
with special tool and replace them completely.
Replacing period of fuel filter element: replacing once for every
10,000 km.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Fuel supply system and exhaust system — Exhaust system FE-7

Exhaust system
Part drawing

Exhaust elbow gasket joint

Muffler gasket

Nut Exhaust elbow bolt


Three-hole rubber block

Front exhaust pipe

Muffler assembly

Three-hole rubber block

Hexagon flange nut

Muffler gasket

Three-hole rubber block


Hexagon flange bolt

Middle exhaust pipe

Three-hole rubber block

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


FE-8 Fuel supply system and exhaust system — Removal of exhaust pipe assembly

Removal of exhaust pipe assembly


Warning: the removal of all parts of exhaust system is required
to be performed after parking for 30 minutes to prevent
personnel injury caused by high-temperature parts.

1. Firstly remove the exhaust elbow flange and front


exhaust pipe flange coupling bolt and nut with M16
sleeve, ratchet wrench, extension bar and M15 double
offset ring spanner, and pay attention to the liner between
flanges.
Remark: the liner between flanges is stainless steel stamping
and mainly plays the part of sealing, please replace with new
liner after three times assembling and disassembling.

2. Hoist the vehicle with elevator, or under the trench,


remove the middle exhaust pipe flange and front exhaust
pipe flange coupling bolt and nut with M15 sleeve, ratchet
wrench, extension bar and M13 double offset ring
spanner, and pay attention to the liner between flanges,
and in performing this operation, a person must prop
the front exhaust pipe specially to prevent its falling and
injuring the operator.
Remark: the liner between flanges mainly plays the part of
sealing, please replace with new liner after three times
assembling and disassembling.

3. Remove the middle exhaust pipe flange and muffler


flange coupling bolt and nut in the same way, and pay
attention to the liner between flanges and prop the
middle exhaust pipe.
Remark: the liner between flanges mainly plays the part of
sealing, please replace with new liner after three times
assembling and disassembling.
4. Then take down the three-hole rubber block of the middle
exhaust pipe to take down the middle exhaust pipe.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Fuel supply system and exhaust system — Installation of exhaust pipe assembly FE-9

5. Take down the three-hole rubber block in front, middle


and back of the muffler in order so as to take out the
muffler, and in performing this operation, a person must
prop the muffler specially to prevent its falling and injuring
the operator.

Installation of exhaust pipe assembly


1. The clearance between exhaust pipe assembly and each
part at both ends is not less than 15mm
2. 1. Apply proper amount of silicon oil to three-hole rubber
block installation hole before mounting, and the three-
hole rubber block should be strained evenly.
3. The tightening torque of each flange coupling bolt and
nut is:(70 ± 5)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


CL-1

Clutch
Page

Trouble shooting ......................................................... CL-2


Inspection and adjustment of clutch pedal ................... CL-3
Air bleed of clutch ........................................................ CL-3
Clutch control mechanism .......................................... CL-4
Clutch set ................................................................... CL-6
CL

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 ÿwww.fineprint.com.cn


CL-2 Clutch — Trouble shooting

Trouble shooting
Trouble Causes Countermeasures
Hard to shift or Clutch pedal free travel too large Adjust free pedal travel
will not shift Air in the clutch pipeline Discharge the air in clutch system
Trouble of clutch wheel cylinder Replacement
Trouble of clutch master cylinder Replacement
Improper installation position of clutch, too large Inspect clutch plate
deflection, oil adhered or broken of friction lining
Spline of input shaft or clutch plate contaminated or Repair according to needs
with stickers
Trouble of clutch pressure plate Replacement
Transmission Abrasion of clutch guide bearing Replace guide bearing
disconnected with
mesh
Clutch skidding Clutch pedal free travel insufficient Adjust free pedal travel
Oil adhered or broken of clutch friction lining Inspect clutch plate
Trouble of clutch pressure plate Replacement
Block of release yoke Inspect release yoke
Clutch Oil adhered or broken of clutch friction lining Inspect clutch plate
blocked/vibrating Trouble of clutch pressure plate Replace clutch pressure plate
Engine bracket loosened Repair according to needs
Clutch pedal loose Air in the clutch pipeline Discharge the air in clutch system
Trouble of clutch wheel cylinder Replacement
100Trouble of clutch master cylinder Replacement
Too loud noise of Parts in clutch pressure plate loosened Replace clutch pressure plate
clutch Abrasion or contamination of release bearing Replacement
Abrasion of guide bearing Replacement
Block of release yoke Repair according to needs

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Clutch — Inspection and adjustment of clutch pedal,Air bleed of clutch CL-3

Inspection and adjustment of clutch pedal


1. Check the pedal height is correct
The pedal height calculated from dash board:
Adjust the pedal height if it is not correct.

Pedal height
2. Adjust the pedal height if necessary
adjust point
Loosen the tightening nut and turn the adjusting bolt until the
height is correct. Screw down the tightening nut.

Pedal height

Dash board

3. Check the free pedal travel is correct


Gently press the pedal until feeling resistance coming from
the clutch.
Free pedal travel: (5-10)mm
4. Adjust the free pedal travel if necessary
(a) Loosen the tightening nut and turn the push rod until
free pedal travel the travel is correct.
(b) Screw down the tightening nut.
(c) Check pedal height after adjustment of free pedal travel.

Air bleed of clutch


Remark: when operating the clutch system or the air is blocked
in the clutch, discharge the air.
Note: do not leave the brake oil on the paint surface,
and immediately clean it off if there is.
1. Fill the brake oil into the clutch master pump oil cup
Often check the master pump oil cup. Refill the brake oil if
necessary.
2. Connect the vinyl resin pipe with the air release valve
Insert another end of the pipe into the container filling with
half of brake oil.
3. Air bleed of clutch system
(a) Slowly let the clutch peda l move upwa rds a nd
downwards several times.
(b) When pressurizing the pedal, loosen the air release valve
until the brake oil flows put, and then screw down the
air release valve.
(c) Repeat this action until the air bubble in the brake oil
disappears.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


CL-4 Clutch — Clutch control mechanism

Clutch control mechanism


Part drawing

Clutch master cylinder fuel pipe


Clutch master cylinder

25-30
Plastic clip 23 ± 3

Spring clip

20
Clutch hose bracket set

Clutch wheel cylinder

Open retainer

Clutch hose

Seal washer 30-40

30 ± 3

N ·m : Specified torque

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Clutch — Clutch control mechanism CL-5

Removal of clutch master pump and wheel


pump
1. Drain off the clutch fluid
Remove the hose connection hole bolt with specification of
16 open wrench, and cover the wheel pump oil outlet with
cloth to prevent the brake oil spattering, and continuously
depress the clutch pedal several times to drain off the clutch
fluid.

2. Removal of the clutch master cylinder


Remove the master pump hitch yoke and the pedal connection
cotter pin and straight pin, and remove two installation master
pump nuts Q32008 with specification of 16 sleeve wrench,
and the master pump could be taken down. Check the clutch
master pump, if there is abnormal noise inside the master pump
and oil leakage etc, replace the master pump as a whole.

Precautions for installation of clutch control


mechanism
1. Installation of clutch tube
Check the tube is deformed, curling at the connection pipe
orifice is complete, and install the clutch tube after confirming
there is no problem, and fix the tube in the front wall clip and
tube clip.
2. Coat lithium base grease at each rotating part.
3. Check the clutch hose surface -- cracks, oil leakage and
dog leg not permitted, and fix the clutch hose in the body
bracket with open retainer and spring clip.
4. Respectively connect the joint of master pump oil pipe
and master pump, wheel pump as the specified
tightening torque.
5. Discharge the air after oil filling of the clutch fuel line
(except refilling after evacuation).
Depress the clutch pedal after toping up the reservoir. If you
feel hard to do this, loosen the air release screw plug with
specification of 11 open wrench to discharge the air, and then
screw down the screw plug. Repeat this several times and
screw down the air release screw plug when there is no air
bubble with the flowing fluid. Refill the oil amount in the
reservoir up to between Max and Min.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


CL-6 Clutch — Clutch set

Clutch set
Part drawing

Release rocker ball support

Release bearing assembly

Cup

Abnormal type spring


Release rocker set

30-40

Clutch pressure plate assembly


Clutch driven plate assembly

N ·m : Specified torque

Removal of clutch set


1. Remove the transmission
Remark: do not dry the gear oil.

2. Remove the clutch pressure plate and clutch plate


(a) Make alignment mark on the clutch pressure plate and
fly wheel.
(b) Gradually loosen the fixing screw until the spring tension
is released.
(c) Remove the fixing bolt, and pull out the clutch pressure
plate and clutch plate.

3. Remove the release bearing and release rocker from


the clutch housing.
(a) Remove the spring and pull out the bearing.
(b) Remove the release rocker and cup.
Warning: when repairing the clutch set, cleaning with
sand grind or dry brush and compressed air is not
permitted to prevent producing powdered scrap (with
water - dipped cloth). The clutch friction disc contains
“asbestos fiber “. If powdered scrap is produced in
repairing, the asbestos fiber in the powdered scrap will
float in the air, and persons who inhale the air containing
asbestos fiber will be injured severely.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Clutch — Clutch set CL-7

Inspection of clutch parts


1. Check the clutch plate is worn or damaged.
Measure the rivet head depth with calipers.
Min. rivet head depth: 0.3mm
If the rivet head depth exceeds the limit, replace the clutch
plate.

2. Check the axial run out of the clutch


Check the axial run out of the clutch with dial gauge.
Max. axial run out: 0.8mm
If the axial run out tolerance exceeds the max. value, replace
the clutch plate.

3. Measure the axial run out of the flywheel


Check the axial run out of the flywheel with dial gauge.
Max. axial run out: 0.2mm
If the axial run out tolerance exceeds the max. value, replace
the flywheel.

4. Check the guide bearing


Apply force along the axial line direction, and turn the bearing
with hands.
If you could not turn or the resistance is too strong, replace
the guide bearing.
Remark: cleaning and lubricating are not necessary for
permanent lubrication of this bearing.

5. Replace the guide bearing if necessary.


(a) Remove the guide bearing with special serrice tools.
SST

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


CL-8 Clutch — Clutch set

(b) Install the guide bearing with special serrice tools.


Remark: after encasing the guide bearing into the flywheel
SST hub, ensure the bearing is in perfect operating status.

6. Check the diaphragm spring is worn.


Check the depth and width of the diaphragm spring abrasion
5
0.6 with calipers.
Limit value: Max. depth: 0.6mm
Max. width: 5mm
If the depth and width of the diaphragm spring abrasion
exceeds the limit value, replace the diaphragm spring.

7. Check the release bearing


Apply force along the axial line direction, and turn the bearing
with hands.
If you could not turn or the resistance is too strong, replace
the release bearing.
Remark: cleaning and lubricating are not necessary for
permanent lubrication of this bearing.

SST Installation of the clutch set


1. Install the clutch driven plate assembly on the flywheel.
Flywheel Install the clutch driven plate assembly on the flywheel with
side
special service tool.

2. Mounting clutch pressure plate assembly


Alignment (a) Line the alignment mark of clutch pressure plate and
mark flywheel.
(b) Screw down the bolt evenly, and repeat applying force
around the clutch pressure plate till they are tightly jointed
with each other, and screw down the bolt.
Tightening torque: 30N·m
Remark: firstly screw down the uppermost bolt of the three
bolts near the locating pin.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Clutch — Clutch set CL-9

3. Check the height at the disengaging pawl of the


SST diaphragm spring is consistent.
Check the difference in height at the disengaging pawl of the
diaphragm spring with special serrice tools.
SST
Allowable height change limit: 0.5mm
If the difference in height exceeds the specified value, adjust
with special serrice tools.

4. Coat lithium base grease


Coat lithium base grease on the following parts:
·the contact of the release rocker and the bearing sleeve
·the contact of the release rocker and the push rod
·the release rocker fixed pivot
·Clutch driven plate spline

5. Encase the cup, release rocker, release bearing seat


and bearing into the clutch housing.

6. Install the transmission

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-1

Transmission
Page

Structure drawing ........................................................ MT-2


Precautions ................................................................ MT-2
Trouble shooting ......................................................... MT-3
Disassembling of the transmission ............................. MT-4
Input shaft assembly ................................................... MT-12
Part drawing ............................................................ MT-12
Inspecting the synchronizing ring .................. MT-12 MT
Replacing the bearing .............................................. MT-12
Output shaft assembly ................................................ MT-14
Part drawing ............................................................ MT-14
Disassembling of the output shaft assembly ........... MT-15
Inspection of the output shaft assembly ................... MT-16
Assembling of the output shaft assembly ................ MT-18
Disassembling, inspection and assembling of the
intermediate shaft assembly .................................. MT-22
Part drawing ............................................................ MT-22
Disassembling, inspection and assembling of the
intermediate shaft assembly .................................... MT-22
The assemblage of reverse gear assembly ............. MT-24
Rear housing assembly .............................................. MT-25
Part drawing ............................................................ MT-25
Replacing the oil seal .............................................. MT-25
Replacing the bush.................................................. MT-25
Inspection and replacement of limit mechanism set MT-26
Bearing front cover ...................................................... MT-28
Part drawing ............................................................ MT-28
Replacing the oil seal .............................................. MT-28
The assembling of the transmission......................... MT-29

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 ÿwww.fineprint.com.cn


MT-2 transmission - Structure drawing,Precautions

Structure drawing
This product is manual mechanical triaxial transmission, and the control form is floor type direct control, and
there are 5 forward gears with lock loop type full synchronization and 1 reverse gear with sliding type; this product
applies separation structure with complete aluminium alloy housing, and the gear applies small module and slimness
tooth; this makes this product have the following advantages: compact structure, strong deformability, high intensity,
perfect performance, low noise and light mass etc. The drawing below is the structure drawing of the clutch.
1st shift and 2nd shift gear sleeves

3rd and 4th shift 3rd shift 2nd shift 1st shift 5th shift Control
Clutch housing gear sleeves gear gear gear gear cover Shift lever

Housing Reverse
gear idler
Input Front Intermediate Rear 5th shift Odometer Output shaft
Reverse Middle
shaft cover shaft housing gear
gear coupling plate
sleeve
shaft Middle 5th shift gear

Precautions
Precautions for disassembling and assembling of the transmission
During disassembling of the transmission, pay attention to handle each part with care to avoid knock,
especially the junction plane; put each part in order so as to prevent loss and wrong taking.
When assembling, except the above precautions, the following should be noticed:
1. Do not repeat using various oil seals, shaft retainers and elastic pins after they have been disassembled.
2. Keep all the parts clean, dust, cut chips, rust, oil stain and other impurities must be avoided.
3. For the relative motion friction surface on the parts, lubricant must be coated.
4. Coat lubricant at the mouth of each oil seal, and press into vertically.
5. When assembling each oil seal, do not pass the pressure with rolling objects.
6. When assembling the synchronizer set, spring piston ring opening at both sides must be staggered.
7. During transporting and installing of the assembly, put into a certain gear, and it is strictly forbidden to
erect it under neutral position or make it be impacted forcibly.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - Trouble shooting MT-3

Trouble shooting
Trouble type Possible causes Eliminating methods
Noise too loud or Bearing damaged Replacing the bearing
abnormal
Gear tooth face knocked or eroded Repairing or replacing the gear
Gear axial position or clearance improper or inside Check, repair and adjustment
parts scratched
Lubricant level too low or lubricating insufficient Refilling to the marked position
Using inferior lubricant not complying with quality Replacing with specified lubricant
requirements
Damage with the inside parts of clutch Check, repair and adjustment
Putting into gear Clutch improperly adjusted, releasing incompletely Adjustment
difficult
Control mechanism improperly adjusted Adjustment
Synchronizer toothed ring worn severely Replacing the toothed ring
Oil leakage The oil seal worn or damaged Replacing the oil seal
Refilling oil too much, the oil level too high Check and adjustment
The sealant unevenly coated or the seal washer Recoating the sealant or replacing
damaged the washer
The junction plane knock not repaired in time Repair
The breather plug blocked Cleaning and interpenetrating
Out of gear Gear sleeve or combination tooth severely worn Replacement
Control mechanism improperly installed or Check, adjustment or replacement
damaged
Fork deformed severely or worn Replacement
Set spring or steel ball deformed severely or Check and replacement
damaged
Gear axial clearance too large Check and adjustment
Gear shifting Interlock pin lost or damaged severely Replacement
abnormal
Bearing abnormally Lubricating insufficient or lubricant rejected Check and replacement
ineffective
Lubricant too dirty Replacement
The cleaning of each part in the box not perfect Cleaning
Bearing quality rejected Replacement

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-4 transmission - Disassembling of the transmission

Disassembling of the transmission


1. Remove the release fork and release bearing
2. Remove the backup lamp switch and odometer driven
gear
3. Remove the clutch housing from the transmission case
Remove the 9 bolts.

4. Remove the 5th gear fork shaft set spring screw plug, set
spring and the lock ball
(a) Remove the screw plug from rear cover with socket
wrench.
(b) Take out the spring and the lock ball with bar magnet.
5. Remove the gear shift lever and control cover
(a) Remove the gear shift lever from the control cover
(b) Remove the binding bolt of the control cover.

6. Remove the set mechanism set of the gear-shifting shaft

7. Remove the rear housing


(a) Remove binding bolt of the gear-shifting shaft
(b) Remove the nut fastening the rear housing.

(c) Gently knock out the rear housing with rubber mallet,
and remove the gear-shifting shaft and gear-shifting
rocker.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - Disassembling of the transmission MT-5

8. Remove the front cover


Remove the 8 bolts, and remove the front cover and the front
cover oil seal.

9. Remove the bearing stop rings of input shaft and


intermediate shaft.

10. Take apart the transmission case from the middle


coupling plate
(a) Put the transmission straight as shown in the drawing.
(b) Gently knock out the transmission case with rubber mallet.
(c) Pull out the transmission case from the middle coupling
plate as shown in the drawing.

11. Nip the middle coupling plate on the leg vice


(a) Use 2 clutch housing bolts, washers and appropriate nuts
as shown in the drawing.
Remark: install the washer with contrary direction from the
normal; plus or minus the washer numbers to make the bolt
end align with the washer outer end face.
(b) Nip the middle coupling plate on the leg vice.

12. Remove the set spring screw plug, set spring and lock
ball
(a) Remove each set spring screw plug with torque socket
wrench.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-6 transmission - Disassembling of the transmission

(b) Remove 1st and 2nd , 3rd and 4th and reverse gear fork
shaft and 5th gear fork shaft set spring and lock ball.

13. Remove the gear-shifting forked axle retainer


Gently turn and extract the gear-shifting forked axle retainer
with 2 screwdrivers and 1 hammer.

14. Remove the 5th gear shift fork


(a) Drift out the spring pin with drift pin and hammer.

(b) Gently knock the 5th gear shift fork until it is taken out.
Note: pay attention to the neutral position at the moment.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - Disassembling of the transmission MT-7

15. Remove 5th reverse gear shift guide block and 5th reverse
gear shift forked axle.
(a) Take out the interlock steel ball from the 5th reverse gear
shift guide block.

(b) Remove 5th reverse gear shift guide block and 5th reverse
gear shift fork.

16. Take out the 5th gear shift forked axle

17. Remove the reverse gear shift fork, reverse gear rocker,
reverse gear deflector rod and block
(a) Knock out the elastic pin with tip drift pin and hammer.

(b) Take out the reverse gear shift forked axle and 5th gear
shift forked axle interlock steel ball and interlock guide
column.
(c) Take down the reverse gear shift forked axle.
(d) Take down the reverse gear rocker and deflector block.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-8 transmission - Disassembling of the transmission

18. Remove the 1st and 2nd gear shift fork.


(a) Take out the 5th reverse gear shift fork and 1st and 2nd
gear shift fork interlock pin and interlock guide column
with bar magnet.

(b) Remove the 1st and 2nd gear shift fork location bolt.

(c) Remove the 1st and 2nd gear shift fork.


(d) Take out the short interlock pin between the 1st and 2nd
gear shift fork and 3rd and 4th gear shift fork with bar
magnet.

19. Remove the 3rd and 4th gear shift fork and the 1st and 2nd
gear and 3rd and 4th gear fork.
(a) Knock out the elastic pin with tip drift pin and hammer.

(b) Take out the 3rd and 4th shift fork and the 1st and 2nd gear
and 3rd and 4th gear fork.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - Disassembling of the transmission MT-9

20. Remove the 5th shift coupling gear, 5th gear synchronizer
assembly, 5th shift gear set, 5th shift gear thrust washer
and 5th gear needle bearing.
(a) Gently tap out the intermediate shaft rear shaft retainer
with 2 screwdrivers and 1 hammer.

(b) Take down the 5th gear synchronizer assembly, 5th shift
SST coupling gear and 5th shift gear set.
(c) Remove the 5th gear needle bearing.

21. Remove the 5th shift gear thrust washer and lock ball
(a) Remove the 5th shift gear thrust washer.
(b) Take out the lock ball with bar magnet.

22. Remove the reverse shift rocker bracket


Remove the 2 bolts and reverse shift rocker bracket.

23. Remove the reverse gear idler and reverse gear idler
shaft
(a) Remove the idler shaft set bolt and reverse gear idler
shaft clamping plate.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-10 transmission - Disassembling of the transmission

(b) Remove the reverse gear idler and reverse gear idler shaft.

24. Remove the rear bearing baffle of the output shaft


(a) Remove 4 bolts with torque socket wrench.
(b) Remove the rear bearing baffle of the output shaft.

25. Remove the intermediate gear shaft.


(a) Prize out the rear bearing split ring of the intermediate
gear shaft with split ring pliers.

(b) Remove the intermediate shaft rear bearing with special


SST tool and wrench.
(c) Remove the intermediate gear shaft.

26. Remove the input shaft


Remove the input shaft equipped with synchronizing ring and
13 needle bearings.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - Disassembling of the transmission MT-11

27. Remove the output shaft


(a) Remove the rear bearing stop ring of the output shaft
with split ring pliers.

(b) Pull out the output shaft with hands and gently knock
the middle coupling plate with rubber mallet at the same
time, and remove the output shaft from the middle
coupling plate.

28. Inspecting backup lamp switch


As shown in the drawing, check the terminal is connected—
pressing the switch indicating connecting and loosening it
indicating disconnecting, replace the switch if it does not
comply with the specification.

Pressing
loosening

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-12 transmission - Input shaft assembly

Input shaft assembly


Part drawing

Needle bearing
Input shaft
Bearing

Bearing stop ring

Retainer

Synchronizing ring

Inspecting the synchronizing ring


1. Turn the synchronizing ring and push it into to check
its braking effect.

2. Check the clearance between the synchronizing ring


back and the gear
Standard clearance: (1.0-1.6) mm
Limit clearance: 0.8mm

Replacing the bearing


1. Prize out the input shaft retainer with split ring pliers

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - Input shaft assembly MT-13

2. Prize out the input shaft bearing with forcing machine

3. Install the new bearing with forcing machine and special


serrice tools.

SST

4. Select the retainer to achieve the min. axial clearance


Remark: the clearance value should not be more than 0.1mm.

5. Install the retainer with split ring pliers

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-14 transmission - Output shaft assembly

output shaft assembly


Part drawing

3rd and 4th gear synchronizer engagement sleeve

Synchronizer sliding block 3rd and 4th shift gear needle bearing

Synchronizer
spring piston ring

3rd shift gear set

Synchronizer ring Steel ball


Steel ball

Shaft retainer

3rd and 4th synchronizer hub

Output shaft

1st shift gear bush

1st and 2nd gear synchronizer engagement sleeve Rear bearing stop ring
of the output shaft

Synchronizer sliding block 1st shift gear set

Spring piston ring

2nd shift gear needle bearing

Output shaft rear bearing

1st shift gear needle bearing

1st and 2nd gear synchronizer ring

1st and 2nd gear synchronizer ring

2nd shift gear set


Odometer drive gear retainer

Odometer drive gear


5th shift gear shaft retainer
5th shift gear

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - Output shaft assembly MT-15

Disassembling of the output shaft assembly


1. Remove the odometer drive gear
(a) Prize out the retainers at both ends with split ring pliers.
(b) Remove the odometer drive gear
(c) Take out the lock ball with bar magnet.

2. Remove the 5th shift gear, output shaft rear bearing, 1st
shift gear set, 1st shift gear bush and 1st shift gear needle
bearing.
(a) Turn and extract the 5th shift gear shaft retainer with 2
screwdrivers and 1 hammer.
(b) Remove the output shaft rear bearing, 1st shift gear set
and 1st shift gear bush with forcing machine.
(c) Remove the 1st shift gear needle bearing
3. Remove the synchronizer

4. Remove the steel ball


Take out the steel ball with bar magnet.

5. Remove the 1st and 2nd gear synchronizer assembly, 2nd


shift gear set and 2nd shift gear needle bearing
(a) Remove the 2nd gear synchronizer assembly and 2nd shift
gear set.
(b) Remove the 2nd shift gear needle bearing

6. Remove the engagement sleeve, sliding block and


spring from the 1st and 2nd gear synchronizer assembly
Remove 3 sliding blocks and 2 springs from the synchronizer
assembly with 1 screwdriver.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-16 transmission - Output shaft assembly

7. Remove the 3rd and 4th gear synchronizer assembly, 3rd


shift gear and needle bearing
(a) Remove the split ring with split ring pliers.
(b) Remove the 3rd and 4th gear synchronizer assembly and
3rd shift gear with the forcing machine.
(c) Remove the needle bearing.

8. Remove the engagement sleeve, sliding block and


spring from the 3rd and 4th gear synchronizer assembly
Remove 3 sliding blocks and springs from the engagement
sleeve with 1 screwdriver.

Inspection of the output shaft assembly


3 Shift
1. Measure the axial clearance of each gear
Measure the axial clearance of each gear:
1st , 2nd , 3rd gear: (0.1-0.25)mm

1 Shift 2 Shift

2. Measure the axial play of each gear


Measure the radial clearance of each gear with dial gauge.
Allowable clearance (mm)
st
1 shift gear 0.009-0.032
2nd and 3rd shift gear 0.009-0.033

If the clearance exceeds the above limit, replace the gear, needle
bearing or shaft.

3. Check the output shaft and 1st shift gear bush


(a) Measure the flange thickness of the output shaft with
calipers.
Min. thickness: 4.80mm

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - Output shaft assembly MT-17

(b) Measure the flange thickness of the 1st shift gear bush
with calipers.
Min. thickness: 3.99mm

(c) Measure the outer diameter of the output shaft journal with
micrometer.
nd
At 2 shift gear: 37.974mm
At 3rd shift gear: 34.974mm

(d) Measure the outer diameter of the 1st shift gear bush
with micrometer.
Min. diameter: 38.975mm

(e) Check the radial run out of the shaft with dial gauge
Max. radial run out: 0.05mm

4. Inspect the synchronizing ring


Turn this ring and push it into to check its braking action.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-18 transmission - Output shaft assembly

5. Measure the clearance between the shift fork and


engagement sleeve
Measure the clearance between the gear sleeve and the shift
fork with a clearance gauge.
Max. clearance: 1.0mm

Assembling of the output shaft assembly


1. Assemble the synchronizer
(a) The side with 45¡ãstep of the 3rd and 4th gear synchronizer
hub is facing the input shaft position, and the side with
big chamfer of the 3rd and 4th gear synchronizer gear
bush is facing the input shaft position; the opening
directions of two 3rd and 4th gear synchronizer spring
piston rings should be staggered.

(b) The 1st and 2nd gear synchronizer set is relative to the
installation direction of the output shaft, i.e. the side with
fork facing the middle coupling plate position; the opening
directions of two 1st and 2nd gear synchronizer spring
piston rings should be staggered.

2. Install the 3 rd shift gear set and 3 rd and 4 th gear


synchronizer on the output shaft
(a) Coat gear oil on the shaft and 3rd shift gear needle bearing.
(b) Put the synchronizing ring on the 3rd shift gear set, and
align the synchronizing ring notch with the sliding block.
(c) Encase the needle bearing into the 3rd shift gear set.

(d) Install the 3 rd shift gear set and 3 rd and 4 th gear


synchronizer with forcing machine.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - Output shaft assembly MT-19

3. Install the shaft retainer


Choose a shaft retainer that could make the min. axial clearance
(clearance value not more than 0.1mm), and install it on the
shaft.

4. Measure the axial clearance of 3rd shift gear set


Measure the axial clearance of 3rd shift gear set with clearance
gauge.
Standard clearance: (0.1-0.25) mm

5. Install the 2 nd shift gear set and 1 st and 2 nd gear


synchronizer
(a) Coat gear oil on the 2nd shift gear needle bearing.
(b) Put the synchronizing ring on this gear, and align the
ring notch with the synchronizer sliding block.
(c) Encase the needle bearing into the 2nd shift gear set.

(d) Install the 2 nd shift gear set and 1 st and 2 nd gear


synchronizer set with forcing machine.

6. Measure the axial clearance of 2nd shift gear set


Measure the axial clearance of 2nd shift gear set with feeler
gauge.
Standard clearance: (0.1-0.25) mm

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-20 transmission - Output shaft assembly

7. Install the lock ball and 1st shift gear set


(a) Encase the lock ball into the shaft.

(b) Coat gear oil on the 1st shift gear needle bearing.
(c) Install the 1st shift gear set, synchronizing ring, needle
bearing and 1st shift gear bush.
(d) Install the assembly on the output shaft to align the
synchronizing ring notch with the sliding block.
(e) Turn the 1st shift gear bush to align it with the lock ball.

8. Install the output shaft rear bearing


Install the output shaft bearing on the output shaft with special
service tool and forcing machine to make the groove of the
output shaft rear bearing stop ring face the end.
Remark: hold the 1st shift gear bush to prevent it from falling.

SST

9. Install the 5th shift gear


Install the 5th shift gear with special service tool and forcing
machine.

SST

10. Install the shaft retainer


(a) Choose a 5th shift gear shaft retainer that could make the
min. axial clearance, and the clearance value should not
be more than 0.1mm.
(b) Gently knock tight the 5th shift gear shaft retainer with
screwdriver and hammer.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - Output shaft assembly MT-21

11. Measure the axial clearance of the 1st shift gear


Measure the axial clearance of the 1st shift gear with clearance
gauge.
Standard clearance: (0.1-0.25) mm

12. Install the odometer drive gear


(a) Install the lock ball and the drive gear.
(b) Install the odometer drive gear retainer with shaft retainer
pliers.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-22 transmission - Intermediate shaft assembly and reverse gear idler assembly

Intermediate shaft assembly and reverse gear idler assembly


Part drawing

Front bearing stop ring Intermediate shaft rear bearing


of the intermediate shaft Intermediate gear shaft Rear bearing stop ring of the intermediate shaft
Steel ball
Intermediate shaft front bearing
Reverse gear idler shaft
Reverse gear idler set

Reverse gear idler shaft clamping plate


Front shaft retainer of Synchronizer sliding block
the intermediate shaft 5th gear synchronizer engagement sleeve

5th gear needle bearing

5th shift coupling gear

Spring piston ring


5th shift gear thrust washer
5th shift gear set Synchronizer ring

Disassembling, inspection and assembling


of the intermediate shaft assembly
1. Remove the 5th shift coupling gear, sliding block and
spring piston ring
Remove the 5th shift coupling gear, 3 sliding blocks and 2
spring piston rings with screwdriver.

2. Measure the radial clearance of the intermediate shaft


5th gear
(a) Mount spacer, needle bearing and reverse gear idler on
the intermediate shaft.
(b) Measure the radial clearance of the reverse gear idler
with dial gauge.
Radial clearance: (0.009-0.32) mm

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - Intermediate shaft assembly and reverse gear idler assembly MT-23

3. Check the journal diameter at the intermediate shaft 5th


gear needle bearing installation position
Measure the needle bearing diameter with micrometer.
Allowable limit diameter: 25.975 mm

4. Inspect the synchronizing ring


Turn the shaft retainer and push it into to check its braking
action.

5. Measure the clearance between the shift fork and gear


sleeve
Measure the clearance between the gear sleeve and the shift
fork with a clearance gauge.
Max. clearance: 1.0 mm

6. Replace the bearing


Replace the reverse gear front bearing if necessary
(a) Prize out the shaft retainer with shaft retainer pliers.

(b) Press out the bearing with special service tool.

SST

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-24 transmission - Intermediate shaft assembly and reverse gear idler assembly

(c) Press in the bearing, side ring and inner race with socket
Socket wrench wrench.

(d) Choose a split ring that could make the min. axial
clearance, and install it on the shaft.

7. Install the 5th gear synchronizer engagement sleeve,


sliding block and spring piston ring
(a) Encase the sliding block into the hub and then encase the
Front gear sleeve.
(b) Install the spring piston ring under the sliding block.
Note: the opening directions of the spring piston ring
should be staggered during installing.

The assemblage of reverse gear assembly


1. Check the reverse gear idler
Measure the radial clearance of the reverse gear idler with dial
gauge.
Allowable radial clearance: (0.009-0.033) mm

2. Measure the clearance between the reverse gear idler


and the shift block
Measure the clearance between the reverse gear idler and the
shift block with a clearance gauge.
Max. clearance: 1.0 mm

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - Rear housing assembly MT-25

Rear housing assembly


Part drawing

Rear housing set

Rear housing dust cap


Limit mechanism set

Rear housing oil seal subassembly

Guide oil groove


Set spring screw plug and elastic straight pin

Reservoir

SST Replacing the oil seal


1. Replace the rear housing oil seal if necessary
(a) Remove the oil seal with special service tool.
(b) Press in the new oil seal with special service tool.
SST

2. Replace the odometer driven oil seal if necesssary


(a) Prize out the oil seal with special service tool.
(b) Knock the new oil seal into the shaft bracket with special
service tool.
SST
SST

Replacing the bush


Replace the bush if necessary
SST
(a) Remove the oil seal and dust cap.
(b) Heat the rear housing end up to celsius 80-100 degree in
the oil groove.
(c) Remove the bush and install the new bush with special
service tool.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-26 transmission - Rear housing assembly

Inspection and replacement of limit mecha-


nism set
1. Remove the limit mechanism set
(a) Remove the screw plug with torque socket wrench.

(b) Drift out the elastic straight pin with drift pin and hammer.

(c) Remove the limit mechanism set

2. Check the limit mechanism set


Turn and push into the limit block with hands and it could
return automatically. Otherwise, replace it.

3. Install the limit mechanism set


(a) Encase the limit mechanism set into the rear housing.
(b) As shown in the drawing, drive in the elastic straight pin
with drift pin and hammer.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - Rear housing assembly MT-27

(c) Coat sealant on the screw plug thread.


(d) Fasten the screw plug with torque socket wrench.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-28 transmission - Bearing front cover

Bearing front cover


Part drawing

★ Front cover assembly

Front cover oil seal assembly

★ Precoat parts

Replacing the oil seal


Replace the bearing front cover oil seal if necessary
(a) Prize out the oil seal with screwdriver.

(b) Press in the new oil seal with special service tool.
Oil seal pressing in depth:(13 ± 0.4) mm

SST
Oil seal pressing in depth
13 ± 0.4mm

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - The assembling of the transmission MT-29

The assembling of the transmission


1. Encase the output shaft into the middle coupling plate
(a) Pull out the output shaft and drive in the middle coupling
plate at the same time, and encase the output shaft into
the middle coupling plate.

(b) Encase the rear bearing stop ring of the output shaft
with snap ring pliers.
Remark: the stop ring should be kept close with the middle
coupling plate surface.

2. Encase the input shaft into the output shaft


(a) Coat the grease on 13 needles bearing, and encase the
needles into the input shaft.

(b) Rotate the input shaft into the output shaft to align the
Aligning
three grooves of the synchronizing ring with the
synchronizer sliding block

3. Encase the intermediate shaft into the middle coupling


plate
(a) Install the rear bearing stop ring of the intermediate shaft
on the rear bearing.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-30 transmission - The assembling of the transmission

(b) Encase the intermediate gear shaft into the middle coupling
plate and hold the intermediate gear shaft at the same
time, and install the intermediate shaft rear bearing with
special service tool.

SST

4. Install the output shaft rear bearing baffle


Install and fasten the bolt with torque socket wrench.
Tightening torque: (17-22)N¡¤m

5. Install the reverse gear idler and shaft


(a) Install the reverse gear idler and shaft

(b) Install the reverse gear idler clamping plate and fasten
the bolt.
Tightening torque: (15-20)N¡¤m

6. Install the reverse gear rocker bracket set


Install the reverse gear rocker bracket, and fasten 2 bolts.
Tightening torque: (17-22)N¡¤m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - The assembling of the transmission MT-31

7. Install the steel ball and 5th shift gear thrust washer.

Lock ball

8. Install the 5th shift gear set


(a) Coat gear oil on the needle bearing.
(b) Install the 5th shift gear set

9. Install the synchronizing ring and 5th shift coupling gear


(a) Cover the synchronizer ring on the 5th shift coupling gear
conical surface.

(b) Remove the middle coupling plate from the leg vice.
(c) Put the transmission straight as shown in the drawing.

(d) Align the synchronizing ring groove with the sliding block,
Socket wrench
and install the 5th shift coupling gear with forcing machine.
(e) Place the middle coupling plate on the leg vice.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-32 transmission - The assembling of the transmission

10. Install the split ring


(a) Choose a shaft retainer that could make the min. axial
clearance, and the clearance value should not be more
than 0.1mm.

(b) Encase the shaft retainer with bar copper and hammer.

11. Measure the axial clearance of 5th shift gear set


Measure the axial clearance of 5th shift gear set with a feeler
gauge.
Standard clearance: (0.1-0.3) mm
Max. clearance: 0.3mm

12. Install the 3rd and 4th gear shift forked axle and 1st and
2nd gear shift fork, 3rd and 4th gear shift fork.
(a) Install the 1st and 2nd , 3rd and 4th gear shift fork.
(b) Encase the 3rd and 4th gear shift forked axle into the
middle coupling plate and shift fork.

(c) Install the elastic straight pin of 3rd and 4th gear shift
fork.
Note: the pin opening should be in the same direction
with the axle. (The same with the following)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - The assembling of the transmission MT-33

13. Install the 1st and 2nd gear shift forked axle and 1st and
2nd gear shift fork
(a) Coat the grease on the interlock guide column, and install
it on the 1st and 2nd gear shift forked axle.

(b) Encase the short interlock pin into the middle coupling
plate with bar magnet.
(c) Encase the 1st and 2nd gear shift forked axle into the 1st
and 2nd gear shift fork and middle coupling plate.

(d) Install the 1st and 2nd gear fork set bolt, and screw down
the bolt.
Tightening torque: (13-17)N¡¤m

14. Install the reverse gear deflector rod, reverse gear


rocker and reverse gear block
(a) Assemble the reverse gear deflector rod, reverse gear
rocker and reverse gear block together.
(b) Install the reverse gear rocker on the reverse gear rocker
bracket.

(c) Coat the grease on the interlock guide column, and install
it on the reverse gear shift forked axle.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-34 transmission - The assembling of the transmission

(d) Encase the long interlock pin into the middle coupling
plate with bar magnet.
(e) Encase the reverse gear shift forked axle into the reverse
gear deflector rod and middle coupling plate.

(f) Encase the elastic straight pin with drift pin and hammer.

15. Install the 5th reverse gear shift guide block and 5 th
reverse gear shift forked axle.
(a) Encase the 5th reverse gear shift guide block into the 5th
reverse gear shift forked axle.
(b) Install the 5th gear shift fork.

(c) Encase the steel ball into the 5th reverse gear shift guide
block with bar magnet.
(d) Install the 5th gear shift forked axle as shown in the
drawing.

(e) Encase the interlock steel ball into the middle coupling
plate with bar magnet.
(f) Encase the 5th gear shift forked axle into the middle
coupling plate.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - The assembling of the transmission MT-35

(g) Encase the pin into the 5th gear shift fork with drift pin
and hammer.

(h) Encase the 5th reverse gear shift forked axle into the 5th
reverse gear shift guide block and middle coupling plate.

(i) Encase the elastic straight pin into the 5th reverse gear
shift guide block with drift pin and hammer.

16. Install the gear shift forked axle grip ring


Encase the grip ring with steel bar and hammer.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-36 transmission - The assembling of the transmission

17. Install the steel ball, set spring and set spring screw plug
(a) Install the steel ball and set spring.
Remark: Encase the short spring into the bottom of the middle
coupling plate.

(b) Coat sealant on the screw plug thread.


(c) Install the screw plug, and fasten it with torque socket
wrench.
Tightening torque: (17-22)N·m

18. Remove the middle coupling plate from the leg vice.
(a) Remove the middle coupling plate from the leg vice.
(b) Remove the bolt, nut and washer.

19. Install the transmission case


(a) Coat sealing material on the transmission case junction
sealing material plane as shown in the drawing.

(b) Put the middle coupling plate straight as shown in the


drawing.
(c) Install the transmission case on the middle coupling plate
as shown in the drawing.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


transmission - The assembling of the transmission MT-37

20. Install the front bearing stop ring


(a) Install 2 stop rings on the input shaft bearing and
intermediate shaft front bearing with snap ring pliers.

(b) Install the front cover set coated with sealant.


(c) Coat sealant on the bolt thread.
(d) Install and fasten the bolt.
Tightening torque: (15-20)N·m

21. Install the rear housing, gear shift shaft and gear shift
sealing material block.
(a) Coat the sealing material on the rear housing as shown in
the drawing.

(b) Encase the gear shift shaft equipped with gear shift
deflector rod into the rear housing (not reach the
designated position), and put the transmission into the
3rd gear position.
(c) Put into the gear shift deflector rod from the upper
opening of the rear housing, and continue encasing the
gear shift shaft to let it go through the cross bore of the
gear shift block.
Remark: the installing way of the four wheel drive is the same
with the above.
(d) Insert the gear shift deflector rod into the 3rd and 4th gear
forked axle groove to align the 5th reverse gear shift forked
axle with the rear housing installation hole, and push into
the rear housing.
(e) Install and fasten the rear housing bolt.
Tightening torque: (30-45)N·m
Remark: the installing way of the four wheel drive is the same
with the above.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


MT-38 transmission - The assembling of the transmission

(f) Install and fasten the gear shift block set bolt.
Tightening torque: (15-20)N·m

22. Install the steel ball, spring and screw plug


(a) Coat sealant on the screw plug thread.
(b) Install the steel ball, set spring and set spring screw plug
Tightening torque: (17-22)N·m
23. After installing the rear housing or transmission case,
check the following items
(a) Check the rotation of the input shaft and output shaft is
stable.
(b) Check the shift of each gear is clear and reliable, and
check there is reverse gear lock function.
24. Install the limit mechanism set
When installing, distinguish the left and right-less elastic force
of left limit mechanism set (seen from the output shaft to the
input shaft of the transmission)
Tightening torque: (30-50)N·m
25. Install the shift cover of the transmission
(a) Install the shift cover coated with sealant.
(b) Install 6 bolts, and fasten the bolts.
Tightening torque: (15-20)N·m
26. Install the clutch housing
(a) Install the clutch housing.
(b) Coat sealant on the bolt thread.
(c) Install and fasten 9 bolts.
Tightening torque: (30-45)N·m
27. Install the reverse gear switch
Tightening torque: (20-50)N·m
28. Install the odometer driven gear
(a) Install the odometer driven gear
(b) Install and fasten the bolt.
Tightening torque: (15-20)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-1

Transfer case
Page

Precautions ................................................................ TF-2


Trouble shooting ......................................................... TF-3
Product instruction and simple maintenance ............... TF-5
Disassembling and assembling of the transfer case ... TF-7
Disassembling of the transfer case ............................. TF-9
Cleaning, inspection, repair and replacement .............. TF-14
Cleaning ................................................................. TF-14
Inspection ............................................................... TF-15
Repair or replacement of gear and sprocket tooth ... TF-18
TF
Attached list on parts inspection, repair and replacement stan-
dard ........................................................................ TF-19
The assemblage of the transfer case .......................... TF-22

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 ÿwww.fineprint.com.cn


TF-2 Transfer case — Precautions

Precautions
Precautions for disassembling and assembling of the transfer case
During disassembling of the transfer case, pay attention to handle each part with care to avoid knock,
especially the junction plane; put each part in order so as to prevent loss and wrong taking.
When assembling, except the above precautions, the following should be noticed:
1. Clean all the parts before assembling (except rubber parts and liner).
2. Do not repeat using various oil seals, shaft retainers and elastic pins.
3. Coat lubricant on all friction surfaces, and coat grease on all oil seal mouths.
4. When assembling each bearing, do not pass the pressure with rolling objects.
5. When assembling mouth shape oil seal, do not tilt it.
6. When the transfer case is in operating position, there should not be lubricant leakage at each part.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Transfer case — Trouble shooting TF-3

Trouble shooting
Common trouble Causes Eliminating methods
Electric shift trouble Electrical control element, electrical Refer to vehicle operation manual, and
control module, speed sensor, diagnose the ineffective element and
electrical motor, electrical clutch or replace it as required.
inner connection harness damaged or
ineffective
Shift cam, connecting sleeve, lock Disassemble and check worn or damaged
sleeve, fork or shift guide shaft part. Replace it as required.
damaged or worn.
Shift fork, lock sleeve or gear glued. Disassemble and check the sliding part
could move freely. Replace it as required.
Mechanical shift not Shift rocker or shift connecting bar Replace the damaged parts.
realized (when the shift broken or damaged.
handle is moving) Shift cam guide plate damaged; shift Open the transfer case rear cover, check
fork broken. the damaged parts and replace them.
Mechanical shift difficult or Incorrect operation. Refer to vehicle operation manual, and
putting into gear not to the operate correctly.
specified position Lubricant improper or the amount Fill specified oil product or amount.
insufficient
Shift fork glued. Open the transfer case rear cover, check
and replace the damaged parts.
Sliding connecting sleeve, lock sleeve Open the transfer case rear cover, check
or gear glued. the sliding parts could move freely on the
shaft, disassemble and replace the
damaged parts.
Mechanical shift transfer Shift connecting bar mechanism Adjust or repair shift connecting bar
case out of gear damaged or improperly adjusted. mechanism.
Replace the parts severely damaged.
Inner shift parts damaged or severely Replace loosened or worn parts.
worn, shift fork assembly loosened
on the guide shaft or damaged.
Mechanical shift blocked at Shift connecting bar mechanism Adjust or repair shift connecting bar parts.
a certain position improperly adjusted.
Shift fork loosened too greatly on the Open the transfer case and check the fork
shift guide shaft. and guide shaft, and replace the parts as
required.
Shift fork assembly worn, including: Open the transfer case to check the parts
pin and contact roller. are worn, replace the parts if they are
worn.
Shift cam hub and bush worn. Open the transfer case to check the parts
are worn, replace the parts if they are
worn.
Combination tooth damaged. Open the transfer case to check the parts
are worn, replace the parts if they are
worn.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-4 Transfer case — Trouble shooting

Troubleshooting (continued)
Common trouble Causes Eliminating methods
No front wheel drive when Driving chain broken. Disassemble and check the damage condition
putting into four wheel drive of the inner parts, and replace the chain.
Noise with all gears, the Incorrect lubricant or lubricating Replace lubricant or refill the amount as
noise is from the transfer amount insufficient. required.
case not from the clutch, Connecting bolts loosened or Ensure that the torque of all connecting parts
engine, drive shaft or other other connecting parts loosened. reaches specified value.
parts. Noise with transfer case bearing Open the transfer case to check the bearing
and other parts are worn or damaged, and
replace them if damaged or worn parts are
found.
Noise with all gears, the Gear noise. Open and check there are worn or damaged
noise is from the transfer parts (including odometer gear), replace them
case not from the clutch, if worn or damaged parts are found.
engine, drive shaft or other
parts.
Noise at high gear and low Sprocket wheel or chain Open and check there is abrasion or damage,
gear of four wheel drive damaged or worn. and replace the parts if abrasion or damage is
found.
Tire pressure improper. Regulate the tire pressure to proper.
Leakage with the transfer Transfer case housing broken. Replace the housing.
case Leakage with other parts. Prove that it is actually the leakage of transfer
case.
Dry it and check the leaking condition.
The breather pipe blocked. Open and clean, and replace it if necessary.
Lubricant amount more than the Use specified lubricant and regulate to proper
required or the lubricant brand amount.
improperly chosen.
Sealing surface bolt loosened. Screw down the bolt as required.

Different brands of sealer or Use specified sealer and screw down the bolt
unusable sealer. as required.
The oil seal worn or damaged Replace the oil seal.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Transfer case - Product instruction and simple maintenance TF-5

Product instruction and simple mainte-


nance
1. Product instruction
This company applies Borg Warner 45-55 transfer case. It is
2-speed part-time drive, and a set of planetary mechanism
aims to realize decelerating, and the power is passed to the
front drive wheel through 1 high precision chain. The planetary
gear pair and rear output shaft parts of this transfer case are
Borg Warner product assembly type
actively lubricated through oil bath and oil pump.
This transfer case has four gear positions:
l 2H-at two high gear positions, only two rear wheels
The transfer case assembly
are driven, and the drive ratio of the transfer case
number of the manufacturer is 1:1.
l 4H-at four high gear positions, foul wheels are all
Borg Warner product assembly serial number driven, and the drive ratio of the transfer case is
Manufacturing date 1:1.
l N – neutral position (only manual shift transfer case
Display: group number has this gear position), output shaft and input shaft
Display: the last number of year
are disconnected, and no power is passed to the
Display: specific manufacturing date of each month
Display: month wheel.
January (A) to December (L) l 4L-at four low gear positions, foul wheels are all
Example indication:
driven, and the drive ratio of the transfer case is
July 1, 1989, second group
2.48:1.

The shift of mechanical shift transfer case is realized through


one shift rocker controlling one shift cam shape guide plate.
Sign panel: fixed at the outer obvious position of the transfer
case, the detailed information of manufacturing marked on it.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-6 Transfer case - Product instruction and simple maintenance

2. Replacing the lubricant regularly


(a) When replacing the engine lubricant or after driving 8000
km, check the transfer case oil level and refill the
lubricant according to need.
(b) Every year or every 48000km, replace with specified
lubricant.

oil filler plug


Oil drain plug Lubricant class: Dexron ¢ó or other the same class
lubricant.

3. Lubricant inspection methods


(a) Clean up the oil filler plug and the area around.
(b) Screw off the oil filler plug, check the oil could flow
out.
(c) The oil not flowing out indicates the actual oil amount
lower than specified value, and refill specified lubricant
to the transfer case until the oil flows out from the oil
hole.
(d) Screw down the oil filler plug as required torque.
Tightening torque: (19-30)N·m
Precautions: before inspecting or replacing the lubricant,
rotate the vehicle for a while to increase the oil
temperature of the transfer case. Do not open or screw
down the oil drain plug and oil filler plug with hammer or
other attack tool, or the thread on the housing will be
damaged.

4. Replacing the lubricant


(a) Clean up the oil drain plug and oil filler plug and the area
around.
(b) Place a container filling oil under the transfer case.
(c) Screw off the oil drain plug.
(d) Screw off the oil filler plug.
(e) Drain off the lubricant.
(f) Install and screw down the oil drain plug as required
torque.
Tightening torque: (19-30)N·m
(g) Refill lubricant from the oil hole until the oil flows out.
Install and screw down the oil filler plug as required
torque.
Tightening torque: (19-30)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


ÿÿ
Transfer case - Disassembling and assembling of the transfer case TF-7

Disassembling and assembling of the transfer case


3 4
2
1

9 8
1.Input shaft 2. Transfer case front housing
5
3.Transfer case rear cover 4.Flange plate
5.Front output shaft flange plate 6.Breather valve
7.Shim 8.Transmission rear housing
9. Bolt

1. Disassembling of the transfer case is n ot allow ed to h ang dir ectly on the


(a) Drive the vehicle to appropriate lifting jack. transmission through spline shaft, which will
(b) Put the transmission gear position at neutral cause the damage of the transfer case parts.
position, and shift the transfer case to 2H gear (l) Remove the connecting nut between the
and extinguish the engine. transfer case and transmission, and take down
(c) Disconnect the battery cathode. the transfer case.
(d) Lift the vehicle. (m) Directly remove the transfer case backwards
(e) Place the drip pan under the transfer case, and until the spline connection of the transfer case
dismount the transfer case oil drain plug and oil input shaft and the transmission is completely
filler plug to discharge all the lubricant, and then uncoupled.
install two oil plugs over again. (n) Lower the transfer case lifting jack carefully.
(f) Disconnect all the wires and wire harnesses (o) Remove the shim between the transfer case and
related to the transfer case. transmission. Clean up the shim material or glue
(g) Disconnect the odometer connecting wire. on the junction plane of transfer case front
(h) Disassemble the hose on the breather valve of housing and transmission rear housing. Pay
the transfer case. attention not to damage the junction plane.
(i) Uncouple the connection of the front drive shaft 2. Installation of the transfer case
with the transfer case front flange plate. (a) Use a thin sleeve (filled with grease) to coat
(j) Uncouple the connection of the rear drive shaft grease on the transmission output shaft spline.
with the transfer case rear flange plate. (b) Install a new shim on the transfer case
(k) Support the transfer case with lifting jack. installation surface.
Note: before removing the bolts and nuts (c) Lift the transfer case lifting bracket and align
connecting the transfer case and transmission, on the same axial line with the transmission.
ensure that the transfer case is completely Note: before connecting the spline, ensure that
supported by the lifting jack. The transfer case t h e t r an s f e r c a se i s a l i g n e d w i t h t h e

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-8 Transfer case - Disassembling and assembling of the transfer case

transmission. Do not force the transfer case (k) Fill correct brand lubricant.
spline to press into the transmission. Otherwise, Note: in engine starting, not filling correct lubricant
damage may be caused. Rotate the transfer rear and appropriate lubricant amount as required will
output shaft if necessary to make it align with cause the damage of the transfer case.
the spline. Note: when filling oil to the transfer case having
(d) Move the transfer case forward slowly to make been installed on the vehicle, you must use petrol
the transmission input shaft spline and the pin feed pump.
to the transfer case front housing, shim and Note: if the transfer case is removed to repair or
transmission rear housing be jointed completely. check, there will be no oil in the oil duct lubricated
(e) After ensuring that the installation holes of the through the oil pump on the upper part of the
transfer case front housing, shim and the transfer case.Controlling the oil amount depending
transmission rear housing are in alignment, on the opening of the oil filler plug will not be
install the bolt or nut. accurate until the oil pump rotating oil duct is filled
Tightening torque: (35-48)N·m up.If the wheel could be rotated, this could be done
(f) Connect the rear drive shaft and transfer case on the vehicle lifting jack.Recheck the oil level after
rear output flange plate. the oil pump rotating.
(g) Connect the front drive shaft and transfer case
front output flange plate.
(h) Connect the breather valve and breather hose. (l) After inspecting the lubricant, lower the vehicle
(i) Connect the odometer cable at the transfer case and connect the battery cathode.
rear cover.
(j) Connect all the wire harnesses related to the
transfer case.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Transfer case - Disassembling of the transfer case TF-9

4
2 Disassembling of the transfer case
1 1. Simple instruction
5 As to the transfer case, if only the damaged part is repaired,
disassemble the transfer case to the extent that this damaged
3
part could be taken out. The part disassembled from the transfer
case could be either subassembly or full group, and it is not
6 necessary to take it apart unless it contains damaged parts.
2. Disassembling of the transfer case
Place the transfer case on the work bench with rear part or
rear cover upward. Place a wooden block under the front part
to keep the transfer case level. The disassembling process is
as follows
1.Transfer case rear housing
(a) Fix the flange plate, screw off the nut and take down the
2.Flange plate 3.Oil seal
shim, and then remove the flange plate and oil seal.
4.Shim 5.Nut
6.Oil plug (b) Take down two oil plugs from the housing.

1 For electric shift transfer case, remove the electric shift


2
parts. Disassembling steps As follows:
(a) Remove the bolt, shim, three bolts and sensor and harness
7
clips.
3 (b) Remove sensor assembly, and take off O ring from speed
5
4 sensor.
(c) Remove motor assembly.
6

1.Sensor fixing bracket 2.Bolt


3.Speed sensor 4.O ring
5.Sensor assembly 6.Bolt
7.Motor assembly 8.Transfer case rear housing

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-10 Transfer case - Disassembling of the transfer case

8 9
11
1.Transfer case front housing
2.Rear output shaft
7 6
3.Clutch coil assembly
5 10
4 4.Snap ring
3
5.Bearing
6.Nut
2
7.Transfer case cover assembly
12
1 13 8.Sign panel
9.Bolt
16 14
7 10.Odometer drive gear
17
15 11.Oil seal
12.Oil seal
13. Bearing
18 14.Transfer case rear cover
15.Needle bearing
16.Shift guide shaft
9 17. Return spring
18.Magnet
19 19.Harness clip

3. The process of disassembling the rear cover is as follows


(the above drawing):
(a) Remove 9 screws and take down harness clips and sign
panel at the same time. Keep well the sign panel, because
it contains the information replacing the substituting
parts.
(b) Pry the housing gently and disconnect the surface sealer,
and then directly take up the transfer case rear cover
assembly upward.
1
(c) For electric shift transfer case, remove the oil seal, bearing
and 3 nuts and clutch coil assembly.
8
7 (d) Remove the snap ring, pluck out the bearing from rear
cover and remove the odometer gear at the same time.
2 6
5 (e) Pluck out the needle bearing from the transfer case rear
4 cover.
3 (f) Pluck out the oil seal from the transfer case rear cover.
(g) Dismount the magnet from the transfer case front
housing.
9
(h) Remove the return spring from the shift guide shaft.
10
(i) Clean out the sealer on the junction plane of the transfer
case front housing and rear cover, and take care not to
damage the junction plane of the two housings or let the
cleanings fall into the transfer case.
1.Output shaft 6.Snap ring 4. Dismount the connected front axle shift parts
2.Shift engagement 7.Clutch assembly
Remove the following parts from residual transfer case housing
sleeve assembly 8.Tightening snap ring
assembly (electric shift).
3.Lock sleeve 9.Shift guide shaft
4.Return spring 10.Fork (a) Electric shift assembly, remove the snap ring and sliding
5.Engagement sleeve clutch bush from shift lock hub.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Transfer case - Disassembling of the transfer case TF-11

2 (b) Remove the shift lock hub from rear output shaft.
(c) Remove the shift engagement sleeve assembly and shift
1 fork from rear output shaft and shift guide shaft.
5 Disconnect all assemblies and remove the shift guide
3 4
shaft.
(d) Disassemble shift engagement sleeve assembly, and take
7 down the snap ring, engagement sleeve, return spring
and lock sleeve.
6 (e) One plastic fork substitutes early metal fork assembly
and independent contact roller parts.
1.Output shaft 2.Drive sprocket 5. Dismount the chain driving system
3.Driven sprocket 4.Washer Remove the following parts from residual transfer case housing
5.Snap ring 6.Driving chain assembly.
7.Front output shaft (a) Remove the snap ring and washer from front output
shaft.
(b) Remove the drive sprocket, driven sprocket and driving
7 4 chain together from two output shafts.
5
(c) Separate the sprocket from the chain.
6
6. Dismount the oil pump assembly
3 Remove the shaft and pump assembly from residual transfer
2
case housing assembly. Remove the pipe clip, oil piper and
filter.

1.Filter 5.Output shaft


2.Oil pump hose 6.Pump pin
3.Clip 7.Output shaft and
4.Oil pump assembly pump assembly

7. Disassembling of the decelerating shift parts


1 Remove the following parts from residual transfer case housing
2
assembly.
(a) Remove the decelerating hub and decelerating shift fork
assembly from the housing.
(b) Remove two plastic veneers from the decelerating shift
fork assembly.
(c) Only when replacing the damaged parts of the
6 3 decelerating shift fork assembly, disassemble the
4
1.Decelerating hub 5 decelerating shift fork assembly. Cut the plastic sleeve,
7
2.Shift fork veneer and take down the pin and contact roller.
3.Contact roller
4.Pin
5.Pin and contact roller assembly
6.Decelerating shift fork
7.Decelerating shift fork assembly

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-12 Transfer case - Disassembling of the transfer case

8. Front output assembly


4
Remove the following parts from residual transfer case housing
assembly.
(a) Fix the front flange plate, screw off the nut and remove
the shim, and pluck out the front flange plate assembly
and the seal ring.
3 2 (b) If the replacement needs, press down the dust cap from
1 the front flange plate
(c) Remove the front output shaft

6 5
7
8
1.Flange plate 2. Dust cap
3.Flange plate assembly
4.Transfer case front housing
5.Front output shaft 6.Oil seal
7.Washer 8.Nut

9. Dismount the front housing, input shaft assembly and


planetary mechanism assembly.
7
10 Remove the following parts from residual transfer case housing
9
8 assembly.
1 6
5 (a) Remove the breather valve.
4 (b) Remove 6 bolts. Separate the front housing from the
3
transfer case housing, and take down the front housing
16
(take care not to damage the front end cover and transfer
2 case housing).
11 15 (c) Remove the front housing assembly, input shaft assembly
14
and planetary mechanism assembly as groups (loosen
13
12 the snap ring, and remove the input shaft from the front
17
18 end cover).
(d) On the work bench, hold one end of the input shaft, and
19 extend the long end of the snap ring and gently press the
20
front housing, and the front housing assembly could be
disassembled from the residual assembly in this way.
1.Planetary mechanism 12.Oil seal (e) Remove the snap ring and oil seal from the front housing.
assembly 13.Anchor pin Remove the pin only when it needs replacing.
2.Shim 14.Transfer case front (f) After removing the bearing closing ring, remove the
3.Snap ring housing
bearing and shim from the input shaft assembly end.
4.Thrust button 15.Snap ring
Remove the input shaft assembly from the planetary
5.Sun gear 16.Transfer case front
6.Planet carrier housing mechanism assembly.
7.Input shaft assembly 17.Bearing (g) Remove the needle bearing and bearing shell from the
8.Input shaft 18.Bearing closing ring input shaft assembly.
9.Needle bearing 19.Bolt (h) Remove the snap ring, thrust button and sun gear from
10.Bearing shell 20.Breather hole
the planet carrier assembly.
11.Transfer case front
(i) Do not try to disassemble the planet carrier.
housing assembly

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Transfer case - Disassembling of the transfer case TF-13

1 10. Disassemble the shift flange parts (for electric shift


4 transfer case)
3
(a) Remove the electric shift cam set as a whole from the
2
transfer case housing.
(b) Remove the electric shift cam from the shift guide shaft.
5
(c) Clamp the end of the shift guide shaft with soft mouth
jaw vice, and knock with a bolt driver to disconnect the
torsion spring and remove it.

1.Transfer case front housing


2.Shift guide shaft 3.Torsion spring
4.Electric shift 5.Shim

11. Disassemble the transfer case housing assembly


Disassemble the transfer case housing assembly in the
following way.
(a) Remove the oil seal.
(b) Remove the snap spring and pluck out the bearing.
7
6 (c) Remove the anchor pin from the transfer case front
5
4 housing only when the pin is loosened or damaged.
3 (d) Press out the ring gear from the transfer case housing if
2 1
the ring gear needs replacing.
1.Transfer case front housing assembly
2.Ring gear 3.Oil seal
4.Transfer case front housing
5.Anchor pin 6.Ball bearing
7.Snap ring

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-14 Transfer case - Cleaning, inspection, repair and replacement

Cleaning, inspection, repair and replacement


Cleaning
1. Cleaning
Note: before cleaning, firstly check the metal chips condition, and big, small, granular or irregular
granular metal chips indicate the crack or similar damage. Smaller and powdery chips indicate uneven
or excessive abrasion. If metal chips are found, when inspecting the rotating parts and corresponding
matching parts, be extremely careful to check there is damage or abrasion.
(a) General cleaning process
Clean the parts in cleaning agent, and remove the old lubricant and deposits. Wipe off the deposits in the oil
hole with hair brush For the parts that could not be cleaned with hairbrush, take care not to scrape the metal
junction plane etc when cleaning.
(b) Dry the cleaned parts
Dry the parts with compressed air of low pressure (max.137.9kPa). Mopping up with cloth may leave
strand silk. When drying the bearing, hold it with hands to prevent it from rotating.
(c) Lubricate the bearing
After cleaning, immediately lubricate the ball bearing and needle bearing with transfer case oil. When drying,
the bearing without lubricating may cause the damage. Cover the lubricated bearing to prevent dust entering.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Transfer case - Cleaning, inspection, repair and replacement TF-15

Inspection
1. General inspection process
Visually check all the parts (except the parts that should be
replaced by new ones such as oil pump oil pipe, O ring and oil
seal etc) are damaged or excessively and unevenly worn.
Abandon the damaged or worn parts that will affect
performance. The inspection items are as follows:
l Burrs: partially protruded pointed edge of the
material.
l Chips: broken or smashed small block or grain.
l Cracks: the surface line of rent indicating part or
full separating of the material.
l Excessive abrasion: severe or obvious abrasion
exceeding the operating range.
l Shrink deformation: material sliding caused by
partial oppress.
l Pasting: grains of soft metal material torn up and
pasting on hard metal surface.
l Groove mark: partial crack or furrow, generally
meaning the transfer of material not loss.
l Pitting corrosion: the breaking of metal surface
under contact pressure. Color change caused by
the heat produced by metallic friction can be
displayed.
l Step abrasion: visual or perceivable step pro-
duced by excessive abrasion between adjacent
contact surface and non-contact surface.
l Uneven abrasion: partial, unevenly distributed
abrasion. Including pore space, exploring spot,
uneven polishing and other visual showings.
2. Inspection of gear or sprocket tooth
Note: do not mix the cut mark caused by machining with
the extrusion marks. Typical machining marks are as
shown in the left drawing.

Normal gear shaving mark

Normal gear grinding mark

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-16 Transfer case - Cleaning, inspection, repair and replacement

Check the tooth contact zone form of gear or sprocket tooth


as the following way:
(a) Optimal tooth contact zone.

(b) It is allowable for contact zone deviating toward one


side.

(c) It is not allowable for contact zone deviating toward one


side, and replacement is necessary.

(d) It is allowable for contact zone deviating toward another


side.

(e) It is not allowable for contact zone deviating toward


another side, and replacement is necessary.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Transfer case - Cleaning, inspection, repair and replacement TF-17

(f) It is allowable for contact zone deviating toward


addendum.

(g) It is not allowable for contact zone deviating toward


addendum, and replacement is necessary.

(h) It is allowable for contact zone deviating toward


dedendum.

(i) It is not allowable for contact zone deviating toward


dedendum, and replacement is necessary.

4. Inspection of spline tooth


Inspect broken of flaked spline tooth. For partial small block
flaking, repair it in the same way as that of gear tooth flaking,
and you can reuse it. If any spline tooth is broken, this part
must be abandoned. The contact form of spline tooth is
different from that of gear, but the spline displaying step sliding
must be abandoned.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-18 Transfer case - Cleaning, inspection, repair and replacement

Repair or replacement of gear and sprocket


tooth
1. Repair principle
(a) Repair the partial small block flaking with appropriate
manual high-speed grinding tool.
(b) When grinding matrix metal, try your best not to remove
more metal.
(c) Revamp the closed angle or edge as sleeky form line.
The closed angle or edge may flake again and form into
cracks.
(d) Remove burrs with appropriate grinding. Take care to
remove heaved material without destroying the matrix.
(e) Replace the unmendable parts (such as bearing), and
replace the part that you doubt about its continuous
usability.

2. Several conditions for repair or replacement of gear and


sprocket tooth
(a) It is maintainable for the inbreak of both sides of the
interface addendum.

(b) It is maintainable for the inbreak of the intermediate


addendum of the interface.

(c) It is maintainable for the inbreak of the non-interface


side.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Transfer case - Cleaning, inspection, repair and replacement TF-19

(d) It is maintainable for the inbreak of the middle part of


the interface side.

(e) If the middle part of the contact zone is flaked, replace


this gear.

(f) For inbreak of two sides of the addendum, replace this


gear.

Attached list on parts inspection, repair and replacement standard


Parts (items) Inspection Accept/reject
All parts (including all Inspect cracks, contorts and corrosion Reject all parts with cracks
springs) Reject the parts with bends, contorts
and poor circle jumps
Reject all parts with pitting corrosion or
corrosion
All thread parts Inspect the dropout or other damages Reject the parts that could not be screwed
with the thread or without threading
Flange plate Refer to “Inspection” section to inspect Refer to spline inspection in“Inspection”
the spline section
Speed sensor, motor assembly Refer to electrical equipment part Replace parts as required
Parts of electric clutch
Sliding bearing Check the inner surface condition of Reject if there is pitting corrosion or
the sliding bearing damage
Transfer case housing Check the hole matching with the Abandon if there is pitting corrosion or
bearing damage

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-20 Transfer case - Cleaning, inspection, repair and replacement

Attached list on parts inspection, repair and replacement standard


Parts (items) Inspection Accept/reject
Ball bearing Visually check there is flaking, pasting, Reject damaged bearing
pitting corrosion or other damages with Reject damaged or loosened bearing
the ball and ball race of the bearing. Or check the axial clearance exceeds
Be certain that the bearing has been 0.23mm
lubricated, and hold the bearing inner race
and rotate the bearing outer race slowly at
the same time to feel whether the rotating
is smooth or the parts are rusted, and the
bearing should rotate stably without play
and looseness.
Needle bearing Visually check there is flaking, pasting, Reject damaged bearing
pitting corrosion or other damages with
the needle and ball race of the bearing.
Transfer case rear cover, front Check there is burrs or other damages Refer to “Inspection” section to remove
housing and transfer case front obstructing sealing the burrs or replace the dam aged parts
housing
Transfer case rear cover Check the bearing hole Reject if there is pitting corrosion with
the hole
Odometer gear Refer to “Inspection” section to inspect Refer to inspection of gear or sprocket
the gear tooth tooth in “Inspection” section
Transfer case outer Refer to “Inspection” section to inspect Refer to spline inspection
housing,connecting outer sleeve the spline in“Inspection” section
and connecting sleeve
Lock sleeve Check the abrasion or damage condition Reject if step slipping or damage is
of the fork groove Refer to “Inspection” found
section to inspect the spline
Shift guide shaft Check the deformation condition Reject if it bends, and refer
Check the outer circle burrs or other to“Inspection” section to remove burrs,
damages or reject the damaged guide shaft
Check the abrasion condition of the outer Reject if step slipping or damage is
circle found
Shift fork Check the part that the fork matching Reject if step slipping or damage is
with the shift cam and gear sleeve is worn found
of damaged
shift fork assembly Check the abrasion or damage condition Reject this veneer if abrasion or
of the fork veneer matching with the gear damage of thestep is found If the
sleeve contact roller is hard to rotate or it is
Check the contact roller could rotate damaged, use new pin, contact roller
freely or it is damaged and holder assembly
Drive and driven sprocket Refer to “Inspection” section to inspect Refer to inspection of the sprocket
the sprocket tooth tooth in “Inspection” section
Refer to “Inspection” section to inspect Refer to spline inspection
the sprocket spline in“Inspection” section

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Transfer case - Cleaning, inspection, repair and replacement TF-21

Parts (items) Inspection Accept/reject


Driving chain Check the step slipping, loosening or the Reject the drive sprocket with abrasion or
damage of the pin or connecting parts damage
Filter screen Check the filter screen is clean and there is Clean it if necessary; abandon if it is damaged
hole or damage with it
Pump case Check there is pitting corrosion or step Abandon if the pump case is damaged or
slipping with the inner diameter of the pump excessively worn
case
Oil pump pin Check the pitting corrosion condition Abandon if there is abrasion, pitting corrosion
or damage with the pump case
Output shaft Refer to “Inspection” section to inspect the Refer to spline inspection in “Inspection”
spline section
Check the surface condition Reject if there is pitting corrosion or damage
Reject if it bends or poor circle jump with it
Decelerating hub Refer to “Inspection” section to inspect the Refer to spline inspection in “Inspection”
sprocket spline section
Check the abrasion or damage condition of the Reject if step slipping or damage is found
position matching with the fork
Front output shaft Check the surface condition matching with the Reject if there is pitting corrosion or damage
bearing
Refer to “Inspection” section to inspect the
spline
Input shaft Refer to “Inspection” section to Refer to spline inspection in“Inspection”
inspect the spline section
Check the contort condition Reject if it bends or poor circle jump with it
Thrust plate and Check the pitting corrosion condition Reject if there is pitting corrosion or damage
thrust button
Sun gear Refer to “Inspection” section to inspect the Refer to inspection of the gear tooth in
gear tooth “Inspection” section
Refer to “Inspection” section to inspect the Refer to spline inspection in“Inspection”
spline section
Planetary Refer to “Inspection” section to inspect the Refer to inspection of the gear tooth in
mechanism gear tooth “Inspection” section
assembly Check the abrasion of the planetary shaft pin Reject if step slipping or pitting corrosion is
or it is loosened and the abrasion condition of found
the thrust plate
Electric shift cam Check there is pitting corrosion or step Reject if pitting corrosion or step slipping is
slipping found
Shift guide shaft Check there is pitting corrosion or step Reject if step slipping or pitting corrosion is
slipping found
Check the contort condition Reject if it bends
Planetary ring gear Check the matching condition with the Check the transfer case housing assembly to
transfer case housing see whether the ring gear is loosenedin the
Refer to “Inspection” section to inspect the housing
gear tooth Refer to inspection of the gear tooth in
“Inspection” section

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-22 Transfer case - The assemblage of the transfer case

The assemblage of the transfer case


1. Overview
During assembling, please refer to specified instruction in this
chapter. In assembling, pay attention to the following problrms:
(a) When there is requirement for the torque of thread parts,
screw down the thread parts with torque wrench.
(b) During installing, coat grease on small parts to make
them be fixed on the installation position.
(c) When assembling the oil seal and bearing, press the oil
seal and bearing with special tool socket T-13-54-001.
Do not directly knock the oil seal or bearing with
hammer.
2. Lubrication in assembling
Lubricate all the inner parts not yet lubricated with correct
lubricant before assembling to make it easy for assembling
and provide initial lubrication.
(a) Before assembling, O ring or the oil seal of shaft without
lubrication may cause damage.
(b) Ensure the bearing or bushing could be lubricated
completely before assembling. Operating the bearing or
bushing without lubrication even for a short time will
cause the damage.
(c) mouth and the metalwork matching with it.
3. The assembling of the transfer case housing
Install the parts removed from the transfer case housing, the
7
6 process is as follows:
5
4 (a) If the ring gear is replaced, when pressing into new ring
3 1 gear, align the tooth shape protuberance of the new ring
2
gear with corresponding gullet in the transfer case front
housing, and press into the ring gear as shown in the
1.Transfer case front housing assembly
2.Ring gear 3.Oil seal lower left drawing, and the chamfer end enters first.
4.Transfer case front housing Ensure the ring gear does not upwarp and it is tightly
5.Anchor pin 6.Ball bearing fixed in the housing.
7.Snap ring (b) If two anchor pins are removed, encase two new anchor
pins into the housing.
(c) Press the bearing into the transfer case front housing
2 3 and well install the snap ring.
105 1 (d) Place the new oil seal as shown in the lower left drawing
and press it into the housing.

1.Oil seal 2.Transfer case front housing


3.Ring gear 4.Anchor pin

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Transfer case - The assemblage of the transfer case TF-23

4. The assembling of mechanical shift flange parts ( electric


shift transfer case)
2
4
For electric shift parts assembly, the installing process is as
follows:
1 3
(a) Insert the shim into the inner diameter of the torsion
spring and make it run through the free end of the shift
shaft.

1.Shift guide shaft 2.Torsion spring


3.Electric shift flange 4.Shim

(b) Slide the torsion spring and shim on the shift shaft to
reach the drive tongue, and put the first finger tip of the
torsion spring on the left side of the drive tongue (seen
1
from the free end of the shift shaft).

1.Torsion spring
2.Shim
3.Shift shaft

(c) Twirl the second finger tip of the torsion spring on the
shift shaft to the right end of the drive tongue.

1
3
2

1.Torsion spring 2.Shim 3.Shift shaft

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-24 Transfer case - The assemblage of the transfer case

(d) Try your best to push the torsion spring and shim
1 backwards together.
(e) Install the electric shift cam on the shift shaft, and make
the end with drive tongue on the cam enter first. Fix the
2 drive tongue of the cam under the drive tongue of the
shift shaft and make it between two torsion springs at
the same time, and make it enter as interior as possible.
3 (f) then encase the electric shift cam assembly into the
transfer case housing assembly.

1.Torsion spring 2.Shim 3.Shift shaft

5. The assembling of the front housing, input shaft


7 assembly and planet set
10 Install the following parts on the work bench:
9
8
1 6 (a) Put the planet carrier assembly on the work bench with
5 the snap ring groove end toward upward.
4
3 (b) Encase the sun gear with the protuberant end toward
16 upward. Rotate the planet carrier assembly gear until
the sun gear is completely meshed.
2 (c) Align the protuberant teeth, and encase the thrust button
11 15
14 into the planet carrier assembly.
13 (d) Encase the snap ring and finish the whole planet carrier
12
17 assembly.
18

19
20
1.Planetary mechanism assembly
2.Shim 3.Snap ring
4.Thrust button 5.Sun gear
6.Planet carrier 7.Input shaft assembly
8.Input shaft 9.Needle bearing
10.Bearing shell
11.Transfer case front housing assembly
12.Oil seal 13.Anchor pin
14.Transfer case front housing
15.Snap ring 16.Transfer case front housing
17.Bearing 18.Bearing closing ring
19.Bolt 20.Breather plug

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Transfer case - The assemblage of the transfer case TF-25

(e) If the parts are removed, place the needle bearing as


1.25-1.75mm shown in the drawing and press into the input shaft. At
the same time, press into the new sliding bearing as shown
in the drawing to finish the whole input shaft assembly.
(f) Lift the planetary mechanism assembly and encase it
into the input shaft assembly, and encase the thrust plate
and press into the bearing through the end of the input
shaft. Encase one snap ring into the snap ring groove of
1 2 3 the input shaft and fix the bearing.
1. Needle bearing
2.Rolling bearing
3.Input shaft

(g) If the parts are removed, press new anchor pin into the
3 front housing, the pressing size is as shown in the
12.70mm
drawing.
(h) Place the oil seal as shown in the drawing and press the
oil seal into the front housing.
2
(i) Place the front housing assembly on two wooden blocks
with the housing junction plane toward upward to make
1 clearance between the output shaft assembly and work
bench. Place the assembled input shaft assembly and
planetary mechanism assembly in the front housing to
4
make the input shaft toward downward. Extend the long
1. Anchor pin end of the snap ring, and encase input shaft and planetary
2.Oil seal
mechanism assembly until the snap ring enters into the
3.Transfer case front housing
4.Snap ring
snap ring groove of the bearing outer ring.
(j) Coat sealer of 1.6mm thickness on the junction between
the front end cover and transfer case assembly, and
pass by the thread hole when coating and continue
4
without intermittence at the same time.
(k) Screw down 6 bolts.
Tightening torque: (27-46)N·m
(l) Install the breather valve.
Tightening torque: (27-46)N·m
3 2 6. The assembling of the front output shaft
1 Assemble the following parts:
9 (a) If the dust cap is removed, encase it by pressing.
(b) Put the output shaft in the transfer case front housing,
5 and then install the flange plate assembly, seal ring, washer
6
7 and nut.
8
1. Flange plate 2. Dust cap
(c) Insert into the flange plate hole with torque lever T-13-
3. Flange plate assembly 54-002 and screw it down.
4.Transfer case front housing Tightening torque: (203-244)N·m
5.Front output shaft 6. Seal ring
7.Washer 8.Nut 9.Oil seal

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-26 Transfer case - The assemblage of the transfer case

7. The assembling of the decelerating shift parts.


2
The installing process of parts is as follows:
(a) If the disassembled parts are replaced, assemble the shift
1
fork assembly with new pin contact roller assembly.
Press the pin contact roller assembly into the decelerating
fork hole until the pin is completely through and clipped
3 at position. Ensure the contact roller could rotate freely.
(b) Install two fork veneers on the decelerating fork
assembly.
6 7
1.Reduction gear 8
(c) Combine the decelerating fork assembly with the
5
2.Output shaft 4 decelerating gear sleeve and put them in the housing,
3.Fork veneer and put the decelerating gear sleeve in the above
4.Decelerating shift fork assembly assembled planetary mechanism assembly. Install rear
5.Pin, contact roller and bush assembly
output shaft, and combine the end bearings of the input
6.Decelerating shift fork
shaft and output shaft with the spline of the decelerating
7.Contact roller
8.Pin gear sleeve.
Remark: the assembling of output shaft can be delayed after
the oil pump being installed on the output shaft. Immerse oil
7 4 pump filter screen into the lubricant, and rotate the output
5
shaft clockwise (seen from the rear end of the output shaft),
6 and see whether there is oil from the oil pump to check the oil
3 pump operates normally. Encase the assembled parts as an
assembly into the transfer case housing.
2
8. The assembling of the oil pump
Ensure the oil pump parts are lubricated completely in
1
assembling, and ensure the oil could flow out from the tapered
hole of the oil pump front cover. The installing process of oil
1.Filter 2.Oil pump hose pump is as follows:
3.Clip 4.Oil pump assembly
(a) Install the pin on the rear output shaft.
5.Output shaft 6.Pump pin
7.Output shaft and pump assembly
(b) The oil pump assembly is fixed on the rear output shaft
through the pin.
(c) Put the clip at the end of the oil pipe, and install the oil
pipe on the pump case nozzle tip, and screw down the
2
clip.
9. The assembling of driving chain
1 The assembling process of parts is as follows:Łş
5 (a) On the work bench, after assembling the transfer case
3 4
housing assembly, put the drive sprocket on the rear
end of rear output shaft, and put the driven sprocket on
7 the rear end of front output shaft.
(b) Install the chain on the sprocket.
6 (c) Hold two sprockets and make the chain be close to the
sprockets, put them parallel to the transfer case, and
1. Output shaft 2. Drive sprocket encase the chain and sprocket assembly through the
3.Driven sprocket 4. Washer output shaft, and rotate the driven sprocket gently to
5.Snap ring 6. Driving chain ensure it is meshed with the spline of front output shaft.
7.Front output shaft
(d) Install the shim and snap ring on the front output shaft.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Transfer case - The assemblage of the transfer case TF-27

10. The assembling of the shift lock parts


1
The assembling process of parts is as follows (for electric
shift transfer case):
8
7 (a) Install the return spring, engagement sleeve on the lock
6 sleeve and fix with snap ring to finish 2W-4W lock sleeve
2
5 assembly.
4 (b) Encase the shift guide shaft into the blind hole of the
3 housing through the assembled decelerating fork
assembly.
(c) Install the shift fork on 2W-4W lock sleeve assembly to
9
make the whole assembly slip over the shift guide shaft
10
and rear output shaft.
(d) Joint the rear output shaft spline with 2W-4W shift
engagement sleeve.
1.Output shaft
2.Shift engagement sleeve assembly
3.Lock sleeve 4.Return spring
5.Engagement sleeve 6.Snap ring
7.Clutch assembly 8.Tightening snap ring.
9.Shift guide shaft 10.Fork

2
(e) For electric shift transfer case assembly, encase the
3 4
above assembled electric shift cam set and clutch
Flange groove
housing, and the process is as follows:
(1) Put the electric shift cam set as shown in the drawing.
1 (2) Hold the shift guide shaft toward downward, and gen-
tly lift the fork assembly. Rotate the electric shift cam
set to position to make the contact roller on the decel-
erating fork assembly enter into the groove of the shift
cam, and lock the heave part of the fork at the tail end
of the shift cam. Then lower the set to make it enter
into the transfer case housing, and then joint the shift
shaft on the pin of the transfer case housing.
6 5 (3) Put the clutch housing through shift outer gear sleeve,
1.Electric shift flange 2.Torsion spring and install the snap ring.
3.Shift shaft
4.Decelerating shift fork assembly
5.Shift fork 6.Shift guide shaft

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-28 Transfer case - The assemblage of the transfer case

5 11. The assembling of rear cover


4
Install the parts into the rear cover, and the process is as follows:
(a) Put the rear cover on appropriate press machine with the
3 junction plane toward upward and parallel to the working
2 surface of the press machine.
1
6 (b) Put the needle bearing end with mark upwards, and press it
7
into the rear cover until the upper end of the needle bearing
is lower (40.47-40.97)mm than the rear cover junction plane
matching with the front housing.
(c) Press the ball bearing into the rear cover, and install the
8 snap ring.
1.Clutch coil assembly 2.Snap ring (d) Only for electric shift transfer case, encase the parts as the
3.Ball bearing 4.Rear cover assembly following processes:
5.Nut 6.Oil seal (1) Ensure 4 O rings are all put on the position of the clutch coil
7.Bearing 8.Needle bearing
assembly (one on the coil, three on the pillar bolt). Encase
the clutch coil assembly with the wire and pillar bolt
1 extending out the rear cover, and take care not to damage
1.Bolt 7
9 the wire, and install three nuts and screw down.
2. Harness clip 6
3.Magnet Tightening torque: (8-11)N·m
4. Return spring 8 (2) Encase the motor bearing and oil seal into the rear cover.
5. Shift guide shaft 12. The assembling of rear cover
5 Install the above finished cover assembly into the transfer case
4 housing, and the process is as follows:
(a) Install the return spring on the transfer shift guide shaft.
3 (b) Install the magnet on the groove of the housing.
(c) Coat Loctite 598 with thickness of 1.6mm on the junction
10
plane of the housing, and pass by the thread hole when
coating and continue without intermittence at the same time.
2
1
Note: in the following steps, do not try to buckle the rear
6. Rear cover assembly
7. Sign panel
cover on the transfer case front housing with too much
8.Odometer drive gear force. When the alignment conditions required are met,
9. Oil seal the rear cover can be installed on the front housing
10. Transfer case front housing without too much force. If it could not be installed, take
down the rear cover assembly and check the alignment
6 conditions.
4
5
3 (d) When the rear cover assembly is installed on the transfer
2 case front housing, all the following alignment conditions
1
must be met:
a Align the pin of the housing with the pin hole of the rear
cover.
b Align the rear output shaft with the inner bearing of the
rear cover hole.
c Align the inner blind hole of the rear cover with the shift
guide shaft, and ensure the return spring does not upwarp.
1.Anchor pin 2.Front output shaft Check the hole of the speed sensor on the rear cover with a
3.Shift shaft 4.Return spring pen.
5.Shift guide shaft 6.Output shaft
d Align the shift shaft with the rear cover inner bearing.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Transfer case - The assemblage of the transfer case TF-29

(e) After putting the sign panel, screw down 9 bolts.


2 Tightening torque: (27-46)N·m
1
(f) Encase the odometer drive gear into the rear cover
assembly through rear output shaft spline.
(g) Press new oil seal into the rear cover assembly.

3
4

1.Harness clip 2.Motor assembly


3.Bolt 4.Sign panel

13. Installing the outer electric shift parts (electric shift


1 transfer case)
For electric shift transfer case, the installing process is as
follows:
(a) Place the motor assembly, the triangular groove on the
motor will be in alignment with the shift shaft.

1.Motor assembly
2.Shift shaft

(b) Move the motor to combine with the shift shaft and make
1 2 it joint tightly with the rear cover. Then rotate the motor
clockwise until it is in correct position and aligned with
7 the installation hole.
3 (c) Install O ring on the speed sensor and encase the speed
5 sensor assembly into the rear cover. Install the clip on
4
the upper part of the speed sensor and install three bolts.
6 Tightening torque: (8-11)N·m
(d) Install the bolt and shim at the clip end of the motor.
Tightening torque: (8-11)N·m
8

1.Sensor fixing bracket 2.Bolt


3.Speed sensor 4.O ring
5.Sensor assembly 6.Bolt
7.Motor assembly 8.Rear cover assembly

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


TF-30 Transfer case - The assemblage of the transfer case

4 13. The assembling of the flange plate parts


2
The installing process of parts is as follows:
1
(a) Install two oil plugs on the rear cover.
5
(b) Encase the flange plate, seal ring, shim and tightening
3 nut.
Tightening torque: (203-244)N·m

1.Rear cover assembly 2.Flange plate


3.Oil seal 4.Shim
5.Nut 6.Oil plug .

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


PR-1

Drive shaft
page

Precautions ................................................................ PR-2


Trouble shooting ......................................................... PR-2
Drive shaft .................................................................. PR-3

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


PR-2 Drive shaft — Precautions,Trouble shooting

Precautions
Note: do not clip the drive shaft pipe casing too tightly
with leg vice to prevent causing deformation.

Trouble shooting
Trouble Possible causes Eliminating methods
Noise The spline of universal joint fork worn Replacement
Intermediate bearing worn Replacement
Spider bearing worn or bitten Replacement
Vibration Drive shaft run out tolerance Replacement
Drive shaft imbalance Replacement
The rear bearing bushing of the Replacement
transmission extension housing worn
The spline of universal joint fork bitten Replacement

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Drive shaft — Drive shaft PR-3

Drive shaft
Part drawing
Drive shaft assembly (2WD)
Sliding yoke assembly
Front part of the rear axle drive shaft
Center support assembly

Spline yoke
Circlip
Rear part of the rear axle drive shaft

Flange yoke

80 ± 5 Nut

78 ± 5

Front axle drive shaft assembly (4WD)


Circlip
Spider assembly

Front axle drive shaft assembly

Flange yoke

78 ± 5

Rear axle drive shaft assembly (4WD)

Circlip
Front part of the rear axle drive shaft

Concave margin yoke


Rear part of the rear axle drive shaft
Spider assembly

80 ± 5

78 ± 5

N ·m : Specified torque

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


PR-4 Drive shaft — Drive shaft

Removal of the drive shaft


Firstly remove the center support bolt of the drive shaft, then
remove the connection bolt of the drive shaft and rear axle,
and then
Two wheel drive: Take out the drive shaft assembly from the
transmission output spline shaft, and remove them as a whole.
Four wheel drive: remove the connection bolt of the drive
shaft and transmission, and remove the drive shaft assembly
as a whole.

Installation of the drive shaft


1. drive shaft is damaged, the spline is rusted, and there
is knock or sand hole with the coupling surface etc.
2. Two wheel drive: install the coupling spline bush of the
drive shaft on the transmission output spline shaft
carefully, and then install the center support of the drive
shaft on the center carriage of the frame.
Four wheel drive: link the drive shaft to the transfer case
flange plate with special drive shaft coupling bolt and
nut and spring washer.
3. Link the drive shaft to the axle flange plate with special
drive shaft bolt and nut and spring washer.
4. Tighten the coupling bolt of each drive shaft
Tightening torque: (78 ± 5)N·m
5. Tighten the center support bolt of the drive shaft
Tightening torque: (80 ± 5)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-1

Suspension system and vehicle


axle
Page

Trouble shooting ......................................................... SA-2


Front wheel alignment ................................................. SA-3
(2WD)
Front wheel hub and steering knuckle ......................... SA-6
Front wheel hub and steering knuckle(coil spring type) SA-13
Front suspension ........................................................ SA-19
Front suspension(coil spring type) .............................. SA-33
(4WD)
Front wheel hub and steering knuckle ......................... SA-41
Front suspension ........................................................ SA-50
Front drive shaft .......................................................... SA-64
Front reducer .............................................................. SA-74 SA
Rear
Rear axle shaft ............................................................ SA-105
Rear reducer .............................................................. SA-109
Rear differential ........................................................... SA-120
Rear suspension ........................................................ SA-122

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 ÿwww.fineprint.com.cn


SA-2 Suspension system and vehicle axle—Trouble shooting

Trouble shooting
Phenomena of Happened reason Contents of repair
troubles
Swim/drag Tyres have been worn or charged improperly Charge tyres to proper pressure or
change them
Wheel alignment is wrong Check the situation of wheel alignment
Wheel bearing is tightened too much Adjust wheel bearing
Parts on front/rear suspension have been loosened Tighten or change suspension
or damaged
Steering rod has been loosened or worn Tighten or change steering rod
Connector of steering equipments is ineffective or Adjust or repair steering equipments
damaged.
Vehicle body Vehicle has over load. Check load weight
sinks Absorber has been worn Change
Spring is too weak Change
Swing left and Tyres have been charged improperly Charge tyres to proper pressure
right/Flop up and Stabilizer bar is bent or damaged Change
down Absorber has been worn CHange
Front wheels Tyres have been worn or charged improperly Charge tyres to proper pressure or
Shimmies change them
Each wheel is imbalance Make each wheel balance
Absorber has been worn Change
Wheel alignment is wrong Check the situation of wheel alignment
Wheel bearing has been worn or adjustment is Adjust or adjust wheel bearing
ineffective
Ball joint or bushing has been worn Check ball joint or bushing
Steering rod has been loosened or worn Tighten or change steering rod
Steering organization has been damaged or Adjust or repair steering equipments
adjusted ineffectively
Abnormal Tyres have been charged improperly Charge tyres to proper pressure
abrasion of tyres Absorber has been worn Change
Wheel alignment is wrong Check the situation of wheel alignment
Suspension has been worn Change suspension
Oil leaks from Oil level is too high or oil grade is wrong Discharge oil to regulated oil level or
differential change oil
assembly Oil seal has been worn or damaged Change
Companion flange has been loosened or damaged Tighten or change companion flange
Noise in axle Oil level is too low or oil grade is wrong Add lubricating grease or change oil
according to related regulations
Clearance between planetary gear and driven tooth Check the clearance
bevel gear and differential side gear is too big.
Driven tooth bevel gear, planetary gear or Check each gear
differential side gear have been worn or damaged
Pinion bearing has been worn Change
Bearing of rear axle shaft has been worn. Change
Bearing of differential has been loosened or worn Tighten or change the bearing

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front wheel alignment SA-3

Front wheel alignment


1. Make following inspections to remove all malfunctions
(a) Check whether abrasion and charge of tyres are proper
Charged pressure of tyres: (refer to page PA-4)
(b) Check whether front wheel bearing has been loosened
(c) Check whether front suspension has been loosened.
(d) Check whether steering gearing has been loosened.
(e) Make standard spring test to check whether front
absorber works normally.
2. Adjust the height of vehicle
Adjust the height of vehicle to standard value to check
wheel alignment.
B =(270 ± 2)mm(Height with no-load)
B:The height of front fixed bolts on bottom swing
arm apart from horizontal ground
B

3. Install four-wheel locator


Do according to concrete instructions of facility manufactur-
ing factory.

A B B A 4. Adjust angle of wheels


Remove the cover of stop bolt on steering knuckle to check
Front
the steering angle A of inner wheels.
Steering angle of inner wheels£ŗ=32°
Note: when steering wheels are turned to bottom, wheels
should not touch braking soft pipe on vehicle body.

If maximal steering angle does not accord with standard value,


adjust wheel angle by stop bolt on steering knuckle.
If wheel angle could not be adjusted in standard range all the
time, check and change damaged or worn parts on steering
organization.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-4 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front wheel alignment

Kingpin caster angle


5. Adjust camber angle of front wheels and kingpin
Camber angle of front wheels
caster angle
camber angle of front wheels:(refer to page PA-2)
kingpin caster angle: (refer to page PA-2)
Front

If obliquity is not at regulated value, adjust it by increasing or


decreasing shim on upper arm.
Thickness of shim::3.0、1.5、0.5mm
When shim is increased by 1mm, wheel camber angle changes
7',and kingpin caster angle changes 20'.
Adjust the difference of left and right kingpin caster angle in
30'.
After adjusting wheel camber angle and kingpin caster angle,
if kingpin inclination angle does not reach regulated value all
the time, check whether steering knuckle and front wheels
Adjustment of front cam
are bent or loosened.
If wheel camber angle or kingpin caster angle does not accord
with regulated value, adjust by front or rear adjusting cam.

Decrease Increase

Adjustment of rear cam

Increase Decrease

6. Adjust wheel toe-in


B
Adjust wheel toe-in by following methods:
(a) Shake vehicle up and down to make suspension reach
the stable statement.
(b) When front wheels locate at the beeline forward position,
impel vehicle for 5 m ahead on flat ground.
Front (c) Mark the center of rear parts on front wheels, and measure
the distance “B” between the marks of left and right tyre.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front wheel alignment SA-5

(d) Move vehicle ahead to make the mark on rear part of


tyres move to the height on front part which could be
Move vehicle ahead measured by device.
Remark: if tyres roll too far, repeat step (b).

(e) Measure the distance between the marks on front parts


A of tyres.
(f) Measure the wheel toe-in.
Toe-in=B-A
Testing standard: (refer to page PA-2)
If toe-in does not accord with regulated value, adjust by left
and right tie rod.
(g) When adjusting toe-in, turn the tie rod on left and right
side evenly. After the adjustment, tighten locknut.
Screw-on moment::(55-65)N·m.

(h) Check sideslip


Sideslip: between ±5m/km

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-6 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle

Front wheel hub and steering knuckle


Part drawing

Stabilizer bar

◆ 63 ± 5 ◆ Spring washer
140 ± 10
Upper swing arm Plate braking pliers

Flat washer

◆ Cotter pin
connecting rod of
stabilizer bar Steering knuckle
Locknut
145 ± 15 Stop shim

Flat washer
Lower swing arm
Bush com-

pressed 1/3

Gasket washer 1
◆ Cotter pin Bolt
Rubber cover of
Gasket washer 2 absorber
230 ± 20
Gasket washer 1
Front absorber assembly ◆ 63 ± 5
◆ Spring washer
23 ± 3

90 ± 10 Cover shell of arrester

◆ Oil seal

Bearing

Wheel hub and braking plate


Bearing
N ·m :Specified torque ★ 65 ± 5
◆ Parts no longer for use after service Cover of wheel hu
★ Precoat parts

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle SA-7

Front wheel hub


Disassembly of front wheel hub
1. Dismantle plate braking pliers
Dismantle braking pliers and hang it with tightwire.
Remark: do not dismantle braking soft pipe and braking pipe

2. Dismantle front wheel hub cover


Unscrew fastening bolts to dismantle wheel hub cover with
inner hexagon wrench.

3. Dismantle front wheel hub and front braking plate


(a) Unscrew lock bolt with cross screwdriver and dimantle
stop shim.

SST (b) Dismantle locknut with special serrive tools.

Brief chart of SST

(c) Dismantle wheel hub, braking plate and exterior bearing.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-8 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle

4. Dismantle oil seal of front wheel hub and inner bearing


(a) Prize the oil seal with screwdriver.
(b) Dismantle inner ring on inner bearing from wheel hub.

Inspection and repair of front wheel hub


1. Check each bearing
Clean inner ring and exterior housing ring on each bearing,
and check whether they have be worn or damaged.
2. Change exterior housing ring of bearing
(a) Hit out exterior housing ring with brass stick and hand
hammer.

(b) Press in new exterior housing ring of bearing with special


serrive tools.

SST Brief chart of special


serrive tools

Installation of front wheel hub


1. Spread lubricating grease on inner surface of wheel
hub and exterior housing ring of bearing.
Lubricating grease Lubricating grease: JinZhi HP-R lubricating grease or other
lubricating greases according to following requirements
Representative
Item
parameters
Dropping point,℃ 289
Lost circulation(104℃,6h),g 0.48
Performance of extreme 178
Lubricating grease
pressure(Timken method)okvalue, N
2. Put inner ring of bearing in
Fill in the clearance between inner ring and exterior ring of
bearing with HP-R lubricating grease.

Lubricating greas

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle SA-9

Brief chart of special 3. Install inner bearing and oil seal


serrive tools (a) Put inner bearing in wheel hub.
(b) Hit new oil seal in wheel hub with special serrive tool.
(c) Spread HP-R lubricating grease on lip of oil seal.

4. Install wheel hub on steering knuckle


(a) Install wheel hub on steering knuckle.
(b) Install exterior bearing.

Brief chart of special 5. Adjust pre-load


serrive tools (a) Screw locknut by regulated moment with special serrive
tools.
Screwing moment: (80-100)N·m
(b) Turn wheel hub for 1/3 «1/4 ring to left and right
independently.
(c) Loosen nuts until it could be turned by hand.
SST (d) Tighten locknut again with special serrive tools.
Screwing moment: 28N·m

(e) Check pre-load with spring tensometer.


Pre-load (when starting): (28-56)N

6. Install stop shim


Install stop shim, make the side with counterbore outward,
and fix it on locknut with bolt.
Remark: if the hole for installing bolt on stop shim could not
head the screw thread hole on locknut rightly, dismantle stop
shim, then make a little adjustment for locknut (turn to the
direction whose adjustment is minimal), lastly install the stop
shim.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-10 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle

7. Check pre-load again


Check pre-load again with spring tensometer
Pre-load (when starting): (28-56)N
If pre-load does not accord with regulated value, it is necessary
to dismantle stop shim and adjust with adjusting nut.

8. Install wheel hub cover


(a) Spread silicon rubber plane sealant on the connecting
surface of wheel hub and wheel hub cover.
(b) Spread screw thread lock sealant on the screw thread of
bolt.
(c) Fix wheel hub on wheel hub with inner hexagon bolt,
and screw the bolt by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (45±5)N·m

9. Install plate braking pliers


Install plate braking pliers on steering knuckle, and screw it
by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (140±10)N·m

Steering knuckle
Disassembly of steering knuckle
1. Dismantle plate arrester and front wheel hub
(refer to page SA-7)

2. Dismantle cover shell of arrester

3. Take off steering transverse tie rod from steering knuckle


arm
(a) Dismantle cotter pin and nut on sphere pin.
(b) Take off steering transverse tie rod from steering
knuckle arm with special serrive tools.

SST

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle SA-11

4. Take off connecting rod of stabilizer bar from lower arm


Fix the sphere pin with inner hexagon wrench, then dismantle
self locking nut.

5. Dismantle steering knuckle


(a) Dismantle cotter pin and nuts on upper sphere pin.
SST (b) Take off steering knuckle from upper sphere pin with
special serrive tools.

(c) Dismantle cotter pin and nut on lower sphere pin.


(d) Take off steering knuckle from lower sphere pin with
special serrive tools.
(e) Dismantle steering knuckle.

SST

Inspection and change of steering knuckle


Check whether steering knuckle has crack with coloration
penetrant. If there is any crack, it is necessary to change
steering knuckle.

Installation of steering knuckle


5. Install steering knuckle
(a) Link lower sphere pin to steering knuckle and install slot
nuts.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-12 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle

(b) Press down upper arm to link upper sphere pin to steering
knuckle, and install and screw nuts by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (145±15)N·m
(c) Install new cotter pin.
Remark: when installing cotter pin, head the notch on nut to
pin hole correctly, at this time, nut must be tight.

(d) Unscrew sphere pin nut by regulated moment.


Screwing moment: (230±20)N·m
(e) Install new cotter pin.
Remark: when installing cotter pin, head the notch on nut to
pin hole correctly, at this time, nut must be tight.

2. Link stabilizer bar on lower arm


Support lower arm with jack, fix the sphere pin with inner
hexagon wrench and screw self-locking nut by regulated
moment.
Screwing moment: (63±5)N·m

3. Link steering transverse tie rod on steering knuckle arm


(a) Screw slot nut by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (120±10)N·m
(b) Install new cotter pin.
Remark: when installing cotter pin, head the notch on nut to
pin hole correctly, at this time, nut must be tight.

4. Install cover shell of arrester


Screwing moment: (23±3)N·m

5. Install front wheel hub and plate braking pliers


(refer to page SA-8)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle SA-13

Front wheel hub and steering knuckle(coil spring type)


Part drawing

Upper swing arm


◆ Spring gasket Front braking pliers
140 ± 10

Lower swing arm 145 ± 15

◆ Cotter pin
Cover shell of front arrester

◆ Spring gasket
23 ± 3

230 ± 20
◆ Cotter pin

Steering knuckle

◆ Cotter pin
Oil seal
Bearing

Bearing Stop washer


Wheel hub and braking plate
140 ± 10 Anti-loose cover
Cover of front wheel hub

N ·m :Specified torque

◆ Parts no longer for use after service

Front wheel hub


Disassembly of front wheel hub
Support vehicle frame, and dismantle front wheels
1. Dismantle braking pliers
Dismantle braking pliers and hang it with tightwire
Remark: do not dismantle braking soft pipe.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-14 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle

2. Dismantle the cover of front wheel hub


Dismantle the cover of front wheel hub from the gap touched
by cover and front wheel hub with slot type screwdriver.

3. Dismantle front wheel hub and front braking plate


(a) Dismantle cotter pin, and take off anti-loose cover.
(b) Unscrew locknut on wheel hub bearing with wrench,
and take off stop washer.
(c) Dismantle the assembly of front wheel hub and braking
plate together with inner and exterior bearing of steering
knuckle.

4. Dismantle oil seal and inner bearing


(a) Dismantle assembly of inner ring and roller on exterior
bearing from wheel hub.
(b) Prize the oil seal with screwdriver.
(c) Dismantle assembly of inner ring and roller on inner
bearing from wheel hub.

Inspection of front wheel hub


1. Inspection and change of bearing
(a) Check each bearing
Clean each bearing, and check whether they have been worn
or damaged.
(b) Dismantle exterior ring of bearing
Hit out exterior ring of bearing with copper stick and hand
hammer lightly.

2. Inspection and change of front braking plate


(a) Check the abrasion of front braking plate.
Remark: there must be no any nick on plate surface, and plate
thickness must be more than 24mm.
(b) Dismantle connecting bolt of front wheel hub and braking
plate with wrench.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle SA-15

(c) Connect front wheel hub with bolts on front braking


plate and new spring washer, and screw to regulated
moment with the moment diagonal wrench
Screwing moment: (95±5)N·m

3. Change of exterior ring of bearing


Hit new exterior ring of bearing in carefully with special serrive
tools.
Remark: inner and exterior ring should be changed at the same
SST time.

Installation of front wheel hub


1. Install inner ring of steering knuckle inner bearing, roller
assembly and oil seal of front wheel hub.
Spread (HR-P) lubricating grease on the inner surface of
SST
exterior ring of steering knuckle inner bearing and the surface
of wheel hub inner chamber (the thickness is 5mm), encase
bearing inner ring and roller assembly.
Spread some (HP-R) lubricating grease on the lip of front
wheel hub oil seal, and press front wheel hub oil seal to the
position with special serrive tools.
2. Install exterior ring of exterior bearing of steering knuckle
Spread (HP-R) lubricating grease on inner surface of exterior
ring on steering knuckle exterior bearing, encase inner ring of
steering knuckle exterior bearing and roller assembly, and
spread (HP-R) lubricating grease to fill in the inter space
between inner and exterior ring of bearing.

3. Install front wheel hub on steering knuckle


Install front wheel hub and front braking plate on steering
knuckle, then install stop washer-exterior bearing of steering
knuckle.
4. Adjust pre-load
(a) Install locknut, and screw with wrench by regulated
moment
Screwing moment: (140±10)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-16 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle

(b) Turn wheel hub for 2-3 rings to left a nd right


independently.
(c) Loosen nut until it could be turned by hand.

(d) Tighten locknut again, and tighten bearing in advance.


Screwing moment: (25±5)N·m
(e) Bring wheel hub to rotate at constant speed(45/4s)
with instruction sheet torque wrench.
Range of moment when rotating: (1.0-2.4)N·m

5. Install anti-loose cover and cotter pin


Install anti-loose cover and cotter pin, and disjoin the two feet
of cotter pin.

6. Hit cover of front wheel hub in with rubber hammer.

7. Install braking pliers on steering knuckle


Screwing moment: (140±10)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle SA-17

Steering knuckle
Disassembly of steering knuckle
1. Dismantle braking pliers, front wheel hub and front
braking plate.

2. Dismantle cover shell of front arrester.


Dismantle the connecting bolt of steering knuckle and cover
shell.

3. Take off steering transverse tie rod from steering knuckle


arm
(a) Dismantle cotter pin and nut on sphere pin.
(b) Take off steering transverse tie rod from steering knuckle
arm

4. Dismantle steering knuckle


(a) Dismantle two cotter pins and slot nuts.
(b) Take off steering knuckle from upper and lower sphere
pin, and dismantle steering knuckle.

Inspection and change of steering knuckle


Check steering knuckle
Make steering knuckle clean, check whether steering knuckle
has crack with coloration penetrant. If there is steering knuckle,
change steering knuckle.

Installation of steering knuckle


1. Install steering knuckle
(a) Support lower arm with jack.
(b) Install steering knuckle on lower sphere pin, and install
nuts.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-18 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle

(c) Press down upper arm, install steering knuckle on upper


sphere pin and install nuts.

(d) Screw sphere pin nuts by regulated moment.


Regulated moment: (145±15)N·m
(e) Screw lower sphere pin nuts by regulated moment.
Regulated moment: (230±20)N·m
(f) Install new cotter pin on upper and lower sphere pin.

2. Link steering transverse tie rod to steering knuckle arm


(a) Screw slot nuts by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (120±10)N·m
(b) Install new cotter pin.

3. Install cover shell of front arrester


Screw three M8X12 bolts.
Regulated moment: (23±3)N·m

4. Install front wheel hub and front braking plate

5. Install front braking pliers


Regulated moment: (140±10)N·m

6. Check the location of front wheels

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension SA-19

Front suspension
Part drawing

Shim

★ Upper arm shaft 210 ± 10


Upper arm bushing
Front stabilizer bar
210 ± 10 Upper arm bushing

Upper swing arm


Shim
Rubber cover
63 ± 5
Clamp Upper sphere pin
23 ± 3 Flat shim
78 ± 5 140 ± 10
◆ Cotter pin
Long axle cover of lower arm Torsion rod spring
Torsion rod seat
Connecting rod of stabilizer bar 145 ± 15
290 ± 30
Rear axle of lower arm
Flat shim

Front axle of lower arm Lower swing arm Upper adjusting block
Front axle cover of lower arm

240 ± 20
Adjusting arm

Eccentricity shim Lower adjusting block


◆ Bush compresses 1/3 Gasket washer 1
63 ± 5
Gasket washer 2
Gasket washer 1 Lower sphere pin Adjusting bolt
Rubber cover of absorber
140 ± 10
◆ Cotter pin

230 ± 20

Absorber

90 ± 10

Assembly of front wheel hub and steering knuckle

N ·m :Specified torque

◆ Parts no longer for use after service


★ Precoat parts

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-20 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension

Sphere pin
Inspection of sphere pin
1. Check whether sphere pin has been loosened
(a) Support front part of vehicle with jack, then hold it with
shelf.
(b) Insure front wheels locate beeline advancing position,
then step down braking pedal.
(c) Move swing arm up and down, and check whether
clearance of lower sphere pin is too big.
Maximal vertical clearance: 0mm

2. Check whether upper sphere pin has been loosened


Move wheels up and down, and check clearance of upper
sphere pin is too big.
Maximal vertical clearance: 0mm

3. Check movement of sphere pin


(a) Dismantle sphere pin.
(b) Liking shown in figure, shake sphere pin bolt front and
back for several times before installing nuts.
(c) Turn nuts continually with torsiometer, and turn it for a
circle every 2 to 4 seconds, then read the scale on
torsiometer at fifth circle.
Screwing moment(when turning):
Lower sphere pin: (1-4)N·m
Upper sphere pin: (1-4)N·m

Disassembly of sphere pin


1. Dismantle assembly of steering knuckle and front wheel
hub
(refer to page SA-7)

2. Dismantle lower sphere pin from lower arm

3. Dismantle upper sphere pin from upper arm

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension SA-21

Installation of sphere pin


1. Install upper sphere pin on upper arm
Screwing moment: (78±5)N·m

2. Install lower sphere pin on lower arm


Screwing moment: (140±10)N·m

3. Install assembly of steering knuckle and front wheel hub


(refer to page SA-8)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-22 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension

Torsion rod spring


Disassembly of torsion rod spring
1. Support vehicle frame with jack and hold it with bracket.

2. Make installing marks on torsion rod spring, torsion seat


and adjusting arm.

3. Liking that shown in figure, measure the length of


extended segment on bolts.
A
Remark: when adjusting the distance from ground of chassis,
this measured value could be referred.

4. Loosen adjusting nut until torsion rod spring do not have


tension.

5. Dismantle adjusting arm and torsion rod spring.

Installation of torsion rod spring


Note: there are left and right mark at the back of torsion
rod spring. Please do not change them wrong. Mark L
represents left and mark R represents right.

1. For re-used torsion rod spring


(a) Spread a folium of lithium base lubricating grease on
spline of torsion rod spring.
(b) Install torsion rod spring on torsion rod seat after heading
installing marks rightly.
(c) Install adjusting arm on torsion rod spring after heading
installing marks rightly.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension SA-23

(d) Screw adjusting bolt to make its extended length equal


to the value before disassembly.

2. For new torsion rod spring


(a) Dismantle wheels.
(b) Spread a folium of lithium lubricating grease on spline of
torsion rod spring.
(c) Install torsion rod spring on torsion rod seat.

(d) Put lower arm to limited position to make adjusting arm


install in torsion rod spring by the angle which could
make adjusting bolt screw in upper adjusting block.
Remark: when adjusting angle, repeat it for several times until
it is appropriate.
(e) Screw adjusting bolt by regulated moment.
Screwing limit of nut: A=80mm
(f) Install wheels, dismantle bracket, and make vehicle
bounce for several times to make suspension enter in
stable statement.
(g) Turn adjusting bolt, and adjust the clearance from ground
of chassis (refer to wheel position of front wheels)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-24 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension

Lower swing arm


Disassembly of lower swing arm
1. Take off connecting rod of stabilizer bar from lower arm
(a) Support one side of lower swing arm with jack.
(b) Dismantle connecting nut, take off connecting rod of
stabilizer bar from lower arm

2. Take off absorber from lower arm

3. Disassembly of torsion rod spring


(refer to page SA-22)

4. Take off lower sphere pin from steering knuckle


(a) Dismantle cotter pin.
(b) Dismantle slot nuts.
(c) Take off lower sphere pin from steering knuckle with
special serrice tools.

SST

5. Dismantle front axle of lower arm


(a) Make installing marks on adjusting cam.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension SA-25

(b) Dismantle nuts and front axle of lower arm.

6. Dismantle rear axle of lower arm


Unscrew nuts, dismantle rear axle of lower arm axle and dis-
mantle lower swing arm.

Change of lower swing arm bush


1. Dismantle lower arm short bush
Press out short bush from lower swing arm with special
serrice tools.

SST

2. Install lower arm short bush


Press short bush in lower swing arm with special serrice tools.
Remark: do not spread lubricating grease on bush.

SST

3. Dismantle lower arm long bush


Dismantle lower arm long bush with special serrice tools.

SST

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-26 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension

4. Install lower arm long bush


Install lower arm long bush with special serrice tools.
Remark: do not spread lubricating grease on bush.

SST

Installation of lower swing arm


1. Installation of lower swing arm
(a) Install rear axle of lower arm, screw nuts by regulated
moment.
Screwing moment: (290±30)N·m
(b) Install front axle of lower arm, then install nuts
temporarily.

2. Install assembly of front wheel hub and steering knuckle


(refer to page SA-8)

3. Install absorber on lower swing arm


Install absorber on bracket of lower swing arm
screwing moment: (90±10)N·m

4. Install stabilizer bar on lower swing arm


Screwing moment: (63±5)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension SA-27

5. Install torsion rod spring


(refer to page SA-22)

6. Screw nuts on lower arm front axle by regulated moment


(a) Install wheels, dismantle bracket and make vehicle
bounce for several times to make suspension enter in
stable statement.

(b) Screw nuts by regulated moment after heading installing


marks rightly.
Screwing moment: (240±20)N·m

7. Check locating parameters of wheels


(refer to page SA-3)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-28 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension

Upper swing arm


SST
Disassembly of upper swing arm
1. Take off upper sphere pin from steering knuckle
Dismantle cotter pin and nut, and take off upper sphere pin
from steering knuckle with special serrice tools.

2. Dismantle braking soft pipe on upper arm axle


(a) Unscrew fixed nut on oil pipe with open-end wrench.
(b) Pull out braking oil pipe and plug up it with glue block.
Remark: there are two two-way valves on rear braking oil
pipe near right upper arm axle, when dismantling right upper
swing arm, it is necessary to dismantle these four oil pipe
fixed nuts here and plug up them with glue block to prevent
braking liquid from flowing out.

3. Dismantle braking soft pipe from braking pliers


Dismantle bolts of braking soft pipe, take off braking soft
pipe from braking pliers.
Remark: do not lose copper seal shim.

4. Take off braking soft pipe from bracket of upper arm oil
pipe.
Pull out steel sheet spring slip with pliers, and take off braking
soft pipe from bracket of upper arm oil pipe.

5. Dismantle upper swing arm


Dismantle two bolts, then dismantle upper swing arm from
vehicle frame.
Remark: keep adjusting shim carefully, note down the thick-
ness of adjusting shim to install them on original position again.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front suspension SA-29

Change of upper arm bush


1. Dismantle bush
(a) Dismantle bolts and washer.

(b) Pull out bush with special special tools.


(c) Dismantle upper arm axle, then dismantle the other bush
with same method.

SST

2. Install bush
(a) Press in bush with special tools.

SST

(b) Install upper arm axle, then press in the other bush with
special serrice tools.

SST

3. Screw upper arm axle by regulated torque


(a) Spread whorl locking sealant on two end whorls on upper
90° arm axle, and install washer and nuts.
Remark: adjust the position of upper arm to make installing
plane of sphere pin plumb with installing plane of upper arm
axle.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-30 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)— Front suspension

(b) Screw nuts on upper arm axle by regulated moment.


Screwing moment: (210±10)N·m

Installation of upper swing arm


1. Install upper swing arm on vehicle frame
(a) Install upper hanging arm and extroversion adjusting
shim.
(b) Screw each bolt by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (175±20)N·m
Remark: install shim with same numbers and thickness on
original position.

2. Link braking oil pipe on upper arm axle


Press nuts and screw oil pipe tightly by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (16±2)N·m
Remark: screw four tie-ins on two two-way valve by the
moment above tightly when dismantling right upper arm.

3. Link braking soft pipe on bracket of upper arm oil pipe


(a) Drill braking soft pipe through the hole on bracket of
upper arm oil pipe.
(b) Hit steel sheet spring clip in with hand hammer to fix
braking soft pipe.

4. Link upper sphere pin to steering knuckle


(a) Screw slot nuts by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (145±15)N·m
(b) Install new cotter pin
Remark: when screwing slot nuts, firstly, take lower limited
value 130 N·m; when installing cotter pin, head notch of nuts
to pin boss rightly; when heading, nuts should be tight.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension SA-31

5. Link braking soft pipe to braking pliers


Install copper seal shim, and screw the bolts of braking soft
pipe by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (50±5)N·m
6. Exhaust front braking system
(refer to page BA-6)
Remark: when dismantling right upper arm, it is necessary to
exhaust rear braking system at the same time.

7. Check whether braking liquid has leaked.


8. Screw nuts of upper arm front axle by regulated moment.
Install wheels, dismantle bracket and make vehicle bounce
for several times to make suspension enter in stable statement.

9. Check locating parameters of wheels


(refer to page SA-3)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-32 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension

Stabilizer bar
Disassembly of stabilizer bar
1. Take off connecting rod which supports two sides of
stabilizer bar from stabilizer bar .
Fix sphere with inner hexagon wrench, then dismantle self
tapping nuts.

2. Dismantle bush and clip of stabilizer bar , and dismantle


stabilizer bar .

Installation of stabilizer bar


1. Install stabilizer bar on vehicle frame
Place stabilizer bar on position, and install bush and clip of
stabilizer bar on vehicle frame. Then install bolts temporarily.

2. Link stabilizer bar to connecting rod


Change with new nuts, and screw them by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (63±5)N·m

3. Screw clip locating bolts by regulated moment.


Screwing moment: (23±3)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension(coil spring type) SA-33

Front suspension(coil spring type)


Part drawing

Upper swing arm


210 ± 15

Upper swing axle cover assembly

Upper swing arm axle cover assembly


◆ Spring washer

23 ± 3 Upper sphere pin assembly

145 ± 15 ◆ Cotter pin


Front transverse stabilizer bar

Front suspension
traveler assembly

Assembly of steering knuckle


and wheel hub arrester
200 ± 15
Rubber block
250 ± 20
63 ± 5

Clip
Lower swing arm axle bolt assembly

Eccentricity washer 2
23 ± 3

Lower swing arm axle cover assembly


Eccentricity washer 2

250 ± 20
Lower swing arm
Lower sphere pin assembly
Lower swing arm axle cover assembly

145 ± 10

230 ± 20 ◆ Cotter pin

N ·m :Specified torque

◆ Parts no longer for use after service

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-34 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension(coil spring type)

Sphere pin
Inspection of sphere pin
1. Check whether lower sphere pin has been loosened
(a) Support front part of vehicle with jack, then hold it with
bracket.
(b) Insure front wheels have been in beeline advancing
position, and step down braking pedal.
(c) Move lower swing arm up and down, and check whether
clearance of lower sphere pin is too big.
Maximal vertical clearance: 0mm
2. Check whether upper sphere pin has been loosened
Move wheels up and down, and check clearance of upper
sphere pin is too big.
Maximal vertical clearance: 0mm

3. Check turning situation of sphere pin


(a) Dismantle sphere pin.
(b) Liking that shown in figure, shake cotter pin stud forward
and back several times before installing nuts.
(c) Install nuts and turn nuts continually with torsiometer
for one circle every 2 to 4 seconds. Read the scale at
fifth circle.
Screwing moment(when turning):
Lower sphere pin: (1-4)N·m
Upper sphere pin: (1-3)N·m
Disassembly of sphere pin
1. Dismantle assembly of steering knuckle and front wheel
hub
(refer to page SA-13)

2. Dismantle lower sphere pin from lower arm

3. Dismantle upper sphere pin from upper arm

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension(coil spring type) SA-35

Installation of sphere pin


1. Install upper sphere pin on upper arm
Screwing moment: (23±3)N·m

2. Install lower sphere pin on lower arm


Screwing moment: (145±10)N·m

3. Install assembly of steering knuckle and front wheel hub


(refer to page SA-15)

Lower swing arm


Disassembly of lower swing arm
1. Dismantle absorber, stabilizer bar and steering tie rod

2. Dismantle linking nut of lower sphere pin and steering


knuckle
(a) Dismantle cotter pin
(b) Dismantle slot nut

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-36 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension(coil spring type)

3. Dismantle front axle of lower arm


(a) Make installing mark on front and rear eccentricity washer

(b) Dismantle nuts and lower arm axle bolts.


(c) Separate lower sphere pin from steering knuckle, and
dismantle lower swing arm.

Change of lower swing arm axle cover


1. Dismantle lower swing arm axle cover
SST
Press out lower arm axle cover from lower swing arm with
special tools. Pay attention to pressed direction of axle cover.

2. Install lower swing axle cover


Press new axle cover in bushing (lower swing arm) by cor-
SST rect direction with special tools.
Remark: do not spread lubricating grease on axle cover.

Installation of lower swing arm


1. Install lower swing arm
(a) Install lower swing arm on vehicle frame and install two
lower arm axle bolts.
(b) Install two nuts on lower arm axle bolts temporarily.
Remark: it is not necessary to screw nuts by regulated moment.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension(coil spring type) SA-37

2. Install absorber on lower swing arm


Install absorber on bracket of lower swing arm.
Screwing moment: (200±15)N·m

3. Link lower swing arm and steering knuckle


Install lower sphere pin on steering knuckle, screw slot nuts
and install new cotter pin.
Screwing moment: (230±20)N·m

4. Link stabilizer bar on lower swing arm


Screwing moment: (63±5)N·m

5. Link steering tie rod on steering knuckle arm


(a) Link steering tie rod on steering knuckle arm.
Screwing moment: (120±10)N·m
(b) Install new cotter pin.
Remark: when installing cotter pin, it is necessary to head
notch on nut to pin hole rightly, at this time, nut should be
tight.

6. Screw lower swing front axle nut by regulated moment.


(a) Install wheels, dismantle the support and make vehicle
bounce for several times to make suspension enter in
stable statement.

(b) Arrange installing marks rightly, and screw nuts by


regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (250±20)N·m

7. Check locating parameters of wheel


(refer to page SA-3)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-38 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension(coil spring type)

Upper swing arm


Disassembly of upper swing arm
1. Dismantle front braking oil pipe on upper arm
Unscrew nuts used for fixing oil pipe bracket with open-end
wrench, and dismantle front braking oil pipe from upper swing
arm.

2. Dismantle upper sphere pin from upper swing pin


Dismantle four bolts to separate sphere pin from swing arm

3. Dismantle upper swing arm


(a) Dismantle two linking bolts of upper swing arm

(b) Dismantle upper swing arm from vehicle frame.

Change of upper arm axle cover


1. Press out upper arm axle cover with tools, and pay
attention to pressed direction.

SST

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension(coil spring type) SA-39

2. Press in new upper arm axle cover by correct direction


with tools.

SST

Installation of upper swing arm


1. Install upper swing arm
Install upper swing arm on vehicle frame, and install linking
bolts and nuts of upper swing arm, at this time, it is not nec-
essary to screw nuts by regulated moment.

2. Link upper arm and upper sphere pin


Install upper arm with upper sphere pin together with four
M8×25 bolts, heavy spring washer and nuts.
Screwing moment: (23±3)N·m

3. Screw linking nuts of upper swing arm by regulated


moment.
Screwing moment: (210±15)N·m

4. Link bracket of front braking oil pipe to arm


Screw linking nuts by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (16±2)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-40 Suspension system and vehicle axle(2WD)—Front suspension(coil spring type)

Stabilizer bar
Disassembly of stabilizer bar
1. Take off stabilizer bar from coupling position of lower
swing arm
Fix sphere pin with inner hexagon wrench, dismantle nuts,
then take off stabilizer bar .

2. Dismantle stabilizer bar clip, then dismantle stabilizer


bar .

Installation of stabilizer bar


1. Install stabilizer bar on vehicle frame
Place stabilizer bar on position, and install stabilizer clip on
vehicle frame. Install bolts temporarily, and pre-tighten them.

2. Link stabilizer bar on lower swing arm


Change with new nuts, and screw them by regulated moment.
Screwing moment:(63±5)N·m

3. Screw clip locating bolts by regulated moment


Screwing moment: (23±3)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle SA-41

Front wheel hub and steering knuckle(4WD)


Part drawing

Stabilizer rod

◆ Spring washer
◆ 63 ± 5 Plate arrester

Upper swing arm 140 ± 10

Flat washer

Connecting rod
◆ Cotter pin Drive shaft

of stabilizer rod ◆ Oil seal


Steering knuckle
145 ± 15
Flat washer Locknut
Lower swing arm

Bush com- Roller pin bearing


pressed 1/3
Thrust shim
Gasket washer 1 230 ± 20 Stop shim
Absorber rubber cover Bolt
◆ Cotter pin
Gasket washer 2
◆ 63 ± 5
Gasket washer 1

Absorber ◆ Spring washer

23 ± 3

90 ± 10

Arrester cover shell

Bearing
Flange plate
◆ Oil seal Snap spring
★ 78 ± 5
Bearing

Front wheel hub and braking plate


Wheel hub cover

N ·m :Specified torque

◆ Parts no longer for use after service


★ Precoat parts

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-42 Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle

Front wheel hub


Disassembly of front wheel hub
1. Dismantle plate braking pliers
Dismantle plate braking pliers and hang it with tightwire.
Remark: do not dismantle braking soft pipe and braking pipe.

2. Dismantle front wheel hub cover and flange plate


(a) Unscrew fixed bolts with inner hexagon wrench, then
dismantle wheel hub cover
(b) Dismantle snap spring with pliers, then take off adjusting
washer.
(c) Dismantle flange plate.

3. Dismantle front wheel hub and front braking plate


(a) Unscrew lock bolts with cross screwdriver, then
dismantle stop shim.

SST
(b) Dismantle locknuts with special service tools.

Brief chart of SST

(c) Dismantle wheel hub and braking plate together with


exterior bearing.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle SA-43

4. Dismantle oil seal of front wheel hub and inner bearing.


(a) Prize out oil seal with screwdriver.
(b) Dismantle inner ring of inner bearing from wheel hub.

Inspection and repair of front wheel hub


1. Check each bearing
Wash inner ring and exterior housing ring of each bearing,
and check whether they have been worn or damaged.
2. Change exterior housing ring of bearing
(a) Hit out exterior housing ring of bearing with copper stick
and hand hammer.

(b) Press in new exterior housing ring of bearing with special


tools.

SST
Brief chart of SST

Installation of front wheel hub


1. Spread lubricating grease on inner surface of wheel hub
and exterior housing ring of bearing
Lubricating grease Lubricating grease: JinZhi HP-R lubricating grease or
other lubricating greases according to following
requirements
Representative
Item
parameters
Dropping point,℃ 289
Lost circulation(104℃,6h),g 0.48
Performance of extreme
Lubricating grease 178
pressure(Timken method)okvalue, N
2. Put in inner ring of bearing
Fill in the clearance between inner ring and exterior housing
ring of bearing with HP-R lubricating grease.

Lubricating grease

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-44 Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle

Brief chart of SST 3. Install inner bearing and oil seal


(a) Put inner bearing in wheel hub.
(b) Hit new oil seal in wheel hub with special tools.
(c) Spread HP-R lubricating grease on lip of oil seal.
SST

4. Install wheel hub on steering knuckle.


(a) Install wheel hub on steering knuckle.
(b) Install exterior bearing.

Brief chart of SST


5. Adjust pre-load
(a) Screw locknut by regulated moment with special tools.
Screwing moment: (80-100)N·m
(b) Turn wheel hub for 1/3¡«1/4 ring to left and right
independently.
(c) Loosen nuts until it could be turned by hand.
(d) Tighten locknut again with special tools.
SST Screwing moment: 28N·m

(e) Check pre-load with spring tensometer.


Pre-load (when starting): (28-56)N

6. Install stop shim


Install stop shim, make the side with counterbore outward,
and fix it on locknut with bolt.
Remark: if the hole for installing bolt on stop shim could not
head the screw thread hole on locknut rightly, dismantle stop
shim, then make a little adjustment for locknut (turn to the
direction whose adjustment is minimal), lastly install the stop
shim.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle SA-45

7. Check pre-load again


Check pre-load again with spring tensometer
Pre-load (when starting): (28-56)N
If pre-load does not accord with regulated value, it is necessary
to dismantle stop shim and adjust with adjusting nut.

8. Install flange plate


(a) Install flange plate on wheel hub.
(b) Install snap spring.

9. Install wheel hub cover


(a) Spread silicon rubber plane sealant on the connecting
surface of wheel hub and wheel hub cover.
(b) Spread screw thread lock sealant on the screw thread of
bolt.
Screwing moment: (78±5)N·m

10. Install plate braking pliers


Install plate braking pliers on steering knuckle, and screw it
by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (140±10)N·m

Steering knuckle
Disassembly of steering knuckle
1. Dismantle plate arrester and front wheel hub
(refer to page SA-42)
2. Dismantle cover shell of arrester

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-46 Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle

3. Take off steering transverse tie rod from steering knuckle


arm
(a) Dismantle cotter pin and nut on sphere pin.
(b) Take off steering transverse tie rod from steering knuckle
arm with special tools.

4. Take off connecting rod of stabilizer bar from lower arm.


Fix the sphere pin with inner hexagon wrench, then dismantle
self locking nut.

5. Dismantle steering knuckle


(a) Dismantle cotter pin and nuts on upper sphere pin.
SST
(b) Take off steering knuckle from upper sphere pin with
service special tools.

(c) Dismantle cotter pin and nut on lower sphere pin.


(d) Take off steering knuckle from lower sphere pin with
service special tools.

SST

(e) Support lower arm with jack, and dismantle steering


knuckle.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle SA-47

Inspection and change of steering knuckle


1. Check steering knuckle
Check whether there is any crack on steering knuckle with
coloration penetrant
If there is any crack, it is necessary to change steering
knuckle.

2. Dismantle oil seal of steering knuckle


Prize out oil seal from steering knuckle with screwdriver.

3. Take out stop shim.

4. Dismantle roller pin bearing


Hit out roller pin bearing with copper stick and hand hammer.

5. Installation of roller pin bearing


SST Hit in new roller pin bearing with special tools and hand hammer
lightly.
Remark: when hitting in, make one end with thick end surface
of roller pin bearing upwards.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-48 Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle

6. Installation of stop shim


Reverse angle
Spread HP-R lubricating grease on stop shim installed position
of steering knuckle, and put in the side with reverse angle of
stop shim towards steering knuckle.
Steering knuckle
Remark: it is necessary to measure the thickness of stop shim
before installation, if thickness is less than 1.5mm, change
with new stop shim. And fair thickness of new stop shim is 2
mm.

7. Installation of oil seal of steering knuckle

SST

Installation of steering knuckle


1. Install steering knuckle
(a) Spread lithium base lubricating grease in drive shaft and
dustproof of drive shaft.

(b) Put drive shaft through steering knuckle, at the same


time, link lower sphere pin on steering knuckle and install
slot nuts temporarily.

(c) Press down upper arm and link upper sphere pin on
steering knuckle, then install and screw nuts by regulated
moment.
Screwing moment: (145±15)N·m
(d) Install new cotter pin.
Remark: when installing cotter pin, it is necessary to head the
notch on nut to pin hole correctly, at this time, nut must be
tight.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)— Front wheel hub and steering knuckle SA-49

(e) Screw nuts of lower sphere pin by regulated moment.


Screwing moment: (230±20)N·m
(f) Install new cotter pin.
Remark: when screwing slot nuts, it is well to take the lower
limited value210N·m ,and when installing cotter pin, it is
necessary to head the notch on nut to pin hole correctly, at
this time, nut must be tight.

2. Link stabilizer bar on lower arm


Support lower arm with jack, then fix sphere pin with inner
hexagon wrench and screw locknuts by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (63±5)N·m

3. Link steering tie rod on steering knuckle arm


(a) Screw slot nuts by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (120±10)N·m
(b) Install new cotter pin
Remark: when installing cotter pin, it is necessary to head the
notch on nut to pin hole correctly, at this time, nut must be
tight.

4. Install arrester cover shell


Screwing moment: (23±3)N·m
5. Install front wheel hub and plate braking pliers
(refer to page SA-43)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-50 Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)—Front suspension

Front suspension
Part drawing

Shim

Upper arm bushing ★ Upper arm shaft 210 ± 10

Shim
Front stabilizer bar
Upper arm bushing
210 ± 10

Upper swing arm

Rubber cover
63 ± 5
Upper sphere pin
Clamp

23 ± 3 Flat shim
78 ± 5 ◆ Cotter pin

Long axle cover of 145 ± 15 Torsion rod spring


Connecting rod of stabilizer bar lower arm 140 ± 10

Torsion rod seat


Flat shim

Short axle cover of 290 ± 30 Rear axle of lower arm


lower arm
Front axle of lower arm Upper adjusting block
Lower swing arm
240 ± 20
Adjusting arm

Eccentricity shim
Lower adjusting block
◆ Bush compresses 1/3 Gasket washer 1
63 ± 5
Gasket washer 2 Adjusting bolt
Lower sphere pin
Gasket washer 1
Rubber cover of absorber

140 ± 10
◆ Cotter pin
230 ± 20

90 ± 10

Assembly of front wheel hub and steering knuckle

N ·m :Specified torque

◆ Parts no longer for use after service


★ Precoat parts

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)—Front suspension SA-51

Sphere pin
Inspection of sphere pin
1. Check whether lower sphere pin has been loosened
(a) Support front part of vehicle with jack, then hold it with
bracket.
(b) Insure front wheels have been in beeline advancing
position, and step down braking pedal.
(c) Move lower swing arm up and down, and check whether
clearance of lower sphere pin is too big.
Maximal vertical clearance: 0mm

2. Check whether upper sphere pin has been loosened


Move wheels up and down, and check clearance of up-
per sphere pin is too big.
Maximal vertical clearance: 0mm

3. Check turning situation of sphere pin


(a) Dismantle sphere pin.
(b) Liking that shown in figure, shake cotter pin stud forward
and back several times before installing nuts.
(c) Install nuts and turn nuts continually with torsiometer
for one circle every 2 to 4 seconds. Read the scale at
fifth circle
Screwing moment(when turning):
Lower sphere pin: (1-4)N·m
Upper sphere pin: (1-4)N·m
Disassembly of sphere pin
1. Dismantle assembly of steering knuckle and front wheel
hub
(refer to page SA-42)
2. Dismantle lower sphere pin from lower arm

3. Dismantle upper sphere pin from upper arm

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-52 Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)—Front suspension

Installation of sphere pin


1. Install upper sphere pin on upper arm
Screwing moment: (78 ± 5)N·m

2. Install lower sphere pin on lower arm


Screwing moment: (140 ± 10)N·m

3. Install assembly of steering knuckle and front wheel hub


(refer to page SA-43)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)—Front suspension SA-53

Torsion rod spring


Disassembly of torsion rod spring
1. Make installing marks on torsion rod spring, torsion rod
seat and adjusting arm.

2. A Liking that shown in figure, measure the length of


extended segment on bolts.
A Remark: when adjusting the distance from ground of chassis,
this measured value could be referred.

3. Loosen adjusting nut until torsion rod spring do not have


tension.
4. Dismantle adjusting arm and torsion rod spring.

Installation of torsion rod spring


Note: there are left and right mark at the back of torsion rod
spring. Please do not change them wrong. Mark L represents
left and mark R represents right.

1. For re-used torsion rod spring


(a) Spread a folium of lithium base lubricating grease on
spline of torsion rod spring.
(b) Install torsion rod spring on torsion rod seat after heading
installing marks rightly.
(c) Install adjusting arm on torsion rod spring after heading
installing marks rightly.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-54 Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)—Front suspension

(d) Screw adjusting bolt to make its extended length equal


to the value before disassembly.

2. For new torsion rod spring


(a) Dismantle wheels.
(b) Spread a folium of lithium lubricating grease on spline of
torsion rod spring.
(c) Install torsion rod spring on torsion rod seat.

(d) Put lower arm to limited position to make adjusting arm


install in torsion rod spring by the angle which could
make adjusting bolt screw in upper adjusting block.
Remark: when adjusting angle, repeat it for several times until
it is appropriate.
(e) Screw adjusting bolt by regulated moment.
Screwing limit of nut: A=80mm
(f) Install wheels, dismantle bracket, and make vehicle
bounce for several times to make suspension enter in
stable statement.
(g) Turn adjusting bolt, and adjust the clearance from ground
of chassis (refer to wheel position of front wheels)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)—Front suspension SA-55

Lower swing arm


Disassembly of lower swing arm
1. Disassembly of the assembly of front wheel hub and
steering knuckle
Including disassembly of absorber, stabilizer rod and steering
tie rod.
(refer to page SA-42)

2. Disassembly of torsion rod spring


(refer to page SA-53)

3. Dismantle front axle of lower arm


(a) Make installing marks on adjusting cam.

(b) Dismantle nuts and front axle of lower arm.

4. Dismantle rear axle of lower arm


Unscrew nuts, dismantle rear axle of lower arm axle and
dismantle lower swing arm.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-56 Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)—Front suspension

Change of lower swing arm bush


1. Dismantle lower arm short bush
Press out short bush from lower swing arm with special tools.

SST

2. Install lower arm short bush


Press short bush in lower swing arm with special tools.
Remark: do not spread lubricating grease on bush.

SST

3. Dismantle lower arm long bush


Dismantle lower arm long bush with special tools.

SST

4. Install lower arm long bush


Install lower arm long bush with special tools.
Remark: do not spread lubricating grease on bush.

SST

Installation of lower swing arm


1.Installation of lower swing arm
(a) Install rear axle of lower arm, screw nuts by regulated
moment.
Screwing moment: (290 ± 30)N·m
(b) Install front axle of lower arm, and pre-tighten nuts.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)—Front suspension SA-57

2. Install assembly of front wheel hub and steering knuckle


(refer to page SA-43)

3. Install absorber on lower swing arm


Install absorber on bracket of lower swing arm.
Screwing moment: (90 ± 10)N·m

4. Install stabilizer bar on lower swing arm


Screwing moment: (63 ± 5)N·m

5. Link steering tie rod on steering knuckle arm


(a) Link steering tie rod on steering knuckle arm.
Screwing moment: (120 ± 10)N·m
(b) Install new cotter pin.
Remark: when installing cotter pin, it is necessary to head
notch of nuts to pin boss rightly; when heading, nuts should
be tight.

6. Install torsion rod spring


(refer to page SA-53)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-58 Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)—Front suspension

7. Screw nuts on lower arm front axle by regulated moment


(a) Install wheels, dismantle bracket and make vehicle
bounce for several times to make suspension enter in
stable statement.

(b) Screw nuts by regulated moment after heading installing


marks rightly.
Screwing moment: (240 ± 20)N·m

8. Check locating parameters of wheels


(refer to page SA-3)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)—Front suspension SA-59

Upper swing arm


SST
Disassembly of upper swing arm
1. Take off upper sphere pin from steering knuckle
Dismantle cotter pin and nut, and t ake off upper sphere pin
from steering knuckle with special tools.

2. Dismantle braking soft pipe on upper arm axle


(a) Unscrew fixed nut on oil pipe with open-end wrench.
(b) Pull out braking oil pipe and plug up it with glue block.
Remark: there are two two-way valves on rear braking oil
pipe near right upper arm axle, when dismantling right upper
swing arm, it is necessary to dismantle these four oil pipe
fixed nuts here and plug up them with glue block to prevent
braking liquid from flowing out.

3. Dismantle braking soft pipe from braking pliers


Dismantle bolts of braking soft pipe, take off braking soft
pipe from braking pliers.
Remark: do not lose copper seal shim.

4. Take off braking soft pipe from bracket of upper arm oil
pipe.
Pull out steel sheet spring slip with pliers, and take off braking
soft pipe from bracket of upper arm oil pipe.

5. Dismantle upper swing arm


Dismantle two bolts, then dismantle upper swing arm from
vehicle frame.
Remark: keep adjusting shim carefully, note down the
thickness of adjusting shim to install them on original position
again.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-60 Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)—Front suspension

Change of upper arm bush


1. Dismantle bush
(a) Dismantle bolts and washer.

(b) Pull out bush with special tools.


(c) Dismantle upper arm axle, then dismantle the other bush
with same method.

SST

2. Install bush
(a) Press in bush with special tools.

SST

(b) Install upper arm axle, then press in the other bush with
special tools.

SST

3. Screw upper arm axle by regulated torque


(a) Spread whorl locking sealant on two end whorls on upper
90° arm axle, and install washer and nuts.
Remark: adjust the position of upper arm to make installing
plane of sphere pin plumb with installing plane of upper arm
axle.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)—Front suspension SA-61

(b) Screw nuts on upper arm axle by regulated moment.


Screwing moment: (210 ± 10)N·m

Installation of upper swing arm


1. Install upper swing arm on vehicle frame
(a) Install upper hanging arm and extroversion adjusting
shim.
(b) Screw each bolt by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (175 ± 20)N·m
Remark: install shim with same numbers and thickness on
original position.

2. Link braking oil pipe on upper arm axle


Press nuts and screw oil pipe tightly by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (15-17)N·m
Remark: screw four tie-ins on two two-way valve by the
moment above tightly when dismantling right upper arm.

3. Link braking soft pipe on bracket of upper arm oil pipe


(a) Drill braking soft pipe through the hole on bracket of
upper arm oil pipe.
(b) Hit steel sheet spring clip in with hand hammer to fix
braking soft pipe.

4. Link upper sphere pin to steering knuckle


(a) Screw slot nuts by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (145 ± 15)N·m
(b) Install new cotter pin
Remark: when screwing slot nuts, firstly, take lower limited
value 130 N·m; when installing cotter pin, head notch of
nuts to pin boss rightly; when heading, nuts should be tight.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-62 Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)—Front suspension

5. Link braking soft pipe to braking pliers


Install copper seal shim, and screw the bolts of braking soft
pipe by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (50 ± 5)N·m

6. Exhaust front braking system


(refer to page BA-6)
Remark: when dismantling right upper arm, it is necessary to
exhaust rear braking system at the same time.
7. Check whether braking liquid has leaked.

8. Screw nuts of upper arm front axle by regulated moment.


(a) Install wheels, dismantle bracket and make vehicle
bounce for several times to make suspension enter in
stable statement.

(b) Arrange installing marks rightly and screw nuts by


regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (240 ± 20)N·m

9. Check locating parameters of wheels


(refer to page SA-3)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(4WD)—Front suspension SA-63

Stabilizer bar
Disassembly of stabilizer bar
1. Take off connecting rod which supports two sides of
stabilizer bar from stabilizer bar .
Fix sphere with inner hexagon wrench, then dismantle self
tapping nuts.

2. Dismantle bush and clip of stabilizer bar , and dismantle


stabilizer bar .

Installation of stabilizer bar


1. Install stabilizer bar on vehicle frame
Place stabilizer bar on position, and install bush and clip of
stabilizer bar on vehicle frame. Then arrange installing marks
rightly to make left and right clearance of stabilizer rod keep
consistent. Lastly install bolts temporarily and pre-tighten them.

2. Link stabilizer bar to connecting rod


Change with new nuts, and screw them by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (63 ± 5)N·m

3. Screw clip locating bolts by regulated moment.


Screwing moment: (23 ± 3)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-64 Suspension system and vehicle axle —Front drive shaft

Front drive shaft


Installation resolving chart of front drive shaft assembly on front drive axle

Front drive shaft assembly

Hanger plate-right 90-110 ★

Oil seal-front retarder


Snap spring
Bearing-front retarder
Snap spring

Assembly of front retarder and electric-control separator

Power tie-in of electric clutch

23-26

Front drive axle ventilation pipe connector assembly


Snap spring
Bearing-front retarder
Snap spring
Oil seal-front retarder

Hanger plate-left

★ 90-110

Front drive shaft assembly

N ·m :Specified torque

★ Precoat parts

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle —Front drive shaft SA-65

Front drive shaft resolving chart

Inner trumpet tie-in

Snap spring Three-pin joint assembly

Inner sheath big clip Inner sheath

Inner sheath small clip

Exterior sheath small clip

Exterior sheath
Exterior sheath big clip

outer trumpet tie-in

dustproof cover

Disassembly of front drive shaft assembly


1. Support vehicle at the middle of repair platform or ground
channel, hold its front part (on vehicle frame) to dismantle
Snap spring
left and right front wheel. (Make vehicle locate two-drive
★ Bolt statement before dismantling)
2. Dismantle beam under front drive axle assembly
Flange plate 3. Disconnect the joint of front drive axle flange and
Wheel hub cover transmission shaft, and make installing marks.
4. Discharge lubricating grease in retarder.
5. Unscrew linking bolts of front wheel hub cover, and take
off front wheel hub.
6. Dismantle snap spring from drive shaft with snap spring
pliers, and dismantle steering knuckles on left and right
ends.
(refer to page SA-45)
7. Disconnect power tie-in of electric clutch.

8. Unscrew the bolts on ventilation pipe bracket that are


used for fixing connecter assembly of front drive axle
ventilation pipe with wrench.

Wrench

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-66 Suspension system and vehicle axle —Front drive shaft

180
180

180

N ·m :Specified torque 180

9. Hold fro nt drive axle with jack, then unscrew lift bolts of
★ 90-110 hanger plate and vehicle frame.
10. Dismantle whole drive axle.
Held part
11. Unscrew connecting bolts of hanger plate and front drive
axle assembly.
12. Pull out oil seal, hanger plate, bearing and front drive
shaft assemblies on left and right side.
Note: when pulling out drive shaft assembly, support
underside of drive shaft to make it could not take off
from inner sheath, at the same time, do not break inner
and exterior sheath.
13. Dismantle exterior snap spring of lower bearing with snap
Sn ap sprin g spring pliers.
pliers
Note: in progress of disassembly, support underside of
drive shaft to make it could not take off from inner
sheath, at the same time, do not break inner and exterior
sheath.
Hold up under end

14. Pull out bearing with special service tools.


15. Dismantle snap spring on the other side of lower bearing
Hold with snap spring pliers.
SST Note: in progress of disassembly, support underside of
drive shaft to make it could not take off from inner
sheath, at the same time, do not break inner and exterior
Shim sheath.

Hold up under end


Disassembly of front drive shaft assembly
1. Check front drive shaft assembly
(a) Check whether inner trumpet tie-in could slide fluently
on shaft direction.
(b) Check whether universal joint part has obvious clearance
on redial direction.
(c) Check whether inner and exterior sheath has been
damaged.
Note: it is necessary to use shim plate to avoid damaging
front drive shaft before nipping front drive shaft.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle —Front drive shaft SA-67

2. Dismantle inner sheath big clip


Note: do not break inner and exterior sheath.
Pliers

3. Disassembly of inner trumpet tie-in part


(a) Make installing marks on inner trumpet tie-in and three-
Installing mark
pin joint assembly.
Note: before making marks, remove lubricating grease
in tie-in and do not punch out marks with punch or other
hard things.
(b) Take off inner trumpet tie-in.

4. Disassembly of three-pin joint assembly


Installing mark
(a) Dismantle snap spring with snap spring pliers.
(b) Make installing marks on shaft and three-pin joint
assembly with adz and hand hammer.

(c) Dismantle three-pin joint assembly with copper stick and


hand hammer.
Note: it any copper scrap is on shaft or three-pin joint
assembly, remove it.

5. Dismantle inner sheath


(a) Dismantle inner sheath small clip with pliers.
(b) Move out inner sheath.
Note: remove lubricating grease in sheath, and keep
dismantling spot clean.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-68 Suspension system and vehicle axle —Front drive shaft

6. Dismantle exterior sheath big clip and small clip with gad
screwdriver.

7. Dismantle exterior sheath


Clean sheath and remove lubricating grease on exterior trumpet
tie-in, and do not disconnect exterior trumpet tie-in.

8. Dismantle dustproof cover with screwdriver and hand


hammer.

Installation of front drive shaft assembly


1. Install dustproof cover with screwdriver and hand
hammer.
If dustproof cover has distorted seriously, change with new
one.

2. Harness in exterior sheath big clip, exterior sheath and


exterior sheath small clip.
If exterior sheath has been damaged or its aging is heavy,
change with new one, at the same time, it is necessary to
twine plastic strip and spread some lubricating greases on shaft
end before harnessing.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle —Front drive shaft SA-69

3. Harness inner sheath small clip, inner sheath and inner


sheath big clip
If inner sheath has been damaged or its aging is heavy, change
with new one.

4. Install three-pin joint assembly on front drive shaft


(a) Head one end with transverse angle of three-pin joint
End with
transverse angle assembly to inner shaft direction.
If roller pin bearing part of three-pin joint assembly has been
damaged, change with new three-pin joint assembly.

(b) Arrange the install marks made before dismantling rightly.

(c) Install three-pin joint assembly in front drive shaft with


hand hammer and copper stick.

(d) Install new snap spring with snap spring pliers.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-70 Suspension system and vehicle axle —Front drive shaft

5. Install exterior sheath on exterior trumpet tie-in


CAPLEX or KY1 Use lubricating grease that is provided
as a set of sheath to fill sheath before installing sheath.
Lubricating greases recommended:
Lubricating grease dosage: about 110 grams

6. Install inner trumpet tie-in on front drive shaft


(a) Fill lubricating grease that is provided as a set of sheath
in inner trumpet tie-in and inner sheath.
Lubricating greases recommended: CAPLEX or KY1
Lubricating grease dosage: about 140 grams

(b) Arrange the install marks made before dismantling rightly,


and harness inner trumpet tie-in.
Installing mark (c) Harness inner sheath on inner trumpet tie-in.

7. Nip inner and exterior sheath with inner and exterior


sheath clip
Exterior sheath clip

Inner sheath clip

(a) Use special clip pliers without ear to lock inner sheath
Clip pliers without ear
big clip.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle —Front drive shaft SA-71

(b) Use nutcracker to lock inner sheath small clip.


Make big and small connecting part of sheath locate at
corresponding flute of trumpet tie-in and shaft.
nutcracker

(c) Use special pneumatic power pliers to lock big and small
clip of exterior sheath.
SST

(d) Insure sheathes on both sides could not be elongated or


shortened when front drive shaft locates at standard
length.
Standard length: 400.5mm

If it is only necessary to change exterior parts of front drive


shaft assembly on vehicle, you could disconnect inner trumpet
tie-in of front drive shaft assembly before dismantling left and
right steering knuckle of vehicle, and take out three-pin joint
and shaft from inner trumpet tie-in to change.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-72 Suspension system and vehicle axle —Front drive shaft

Installation of front drive shaft assembly on


front drive axle
1. Harness hanger plate in drive shaft, harness oil seal
Snap spring pliers
and install inner snap spring with snap spring pliers.
If oil seal has been damaged, change it with new one.

Hold up underside

2. Tap in bearing with special service tools


SST Note: hold up under part of drive shaft assembly when
tapping to make it could not take off.
3. Install exterior snap spring on front drive shaft assembly
with snap spring pliers.
4. Install hanger plate, oil seal, snap spring, bearing and
Stick underside snap spring on drive shaft of the other side repeating
methods above.
5. Arrange the spline part on connecting end of drive shaft
and retarder in electric-control clutch and differential
half-shaft gear spline hole of retarder slowly.
6. Drip one to two thread locker in the middle of coupling
bolt thread of hanger plate and retarder.

7. Tighten coupling bolt of hanger plate and drive axle with


wrench, and screw it to regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (90-110)N·m
Note: when screwing bolts, firstly, screw all bolts,
secondly, screw bolts by transverse angle, lastly, check
whether hanger plate has been planished after bolts
have been screwed to regulated moment, if it is not flat,
dismantle hanger plate and re-install.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle —Front drive shaft SA-73

8. Install ventilation pipe connecter assembly, and link each


Installing mark interface between it and front drive axle.
(refer to page SA-103)
9. Firstly, hold up whole drive axle with jack, and use hanger
plate to hang drive axle and screw hanging bolts to
regulated moment, secondly install steering knuckle on
both sides and upper and lower sphere pin, lastly, link
the connecter of front axle ventilation pipe assembly and
vehicle frame and re-link the connecting part of electric-
control separator.
Screwing moment: 180N·m
(Pre-drip one to two thread locker in middle front part of
thread for hanging bolts)
10. Link front drive axle flange and transmission shaft with
bolts by the marks made before dismantling, and screw
it to regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (73-83)N·m
11. Install beam under front drive axle, and screw its linking
bolts to regulated moment
Screwing moment: (73-83)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-74 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

Front reducer
Change of main gear oil seal of front reducer assembly

Front reducer assembly

Washer

Bearing
◆ Oil seal
Spacer bush- Driving bevel gear

:Specified torque 140-160 ◆


N ·m
◆ Parts no longer for use after service Assembly of front reducer Driving bevel gear and dustproof cover

1. Support front part of vehicle, then dismantle left and


Installing mark right front wheel and beam under reducer.
2. Discharge lubricating grease in front reducer, then
dismantle left and right steering knuckle.
3. Sep arate front retarder assem bly flange f rom
transmission shaft, and dismantle front drive axle with
jack.
Before separating retarder and transmission shaft, make
installing marks on them.
4. Dismantle front retarder assembly
(refer to page SA-77)
5. Dismantle assembly of main gear flange and dustproof
cover
(a) Chisel riveted parts on nuts with hand hammer and chisel.

(b) Lock main gear flange with special tools, then dismantle
SST main gear nuts.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-75

(c) Knock down assembly of main gear flange and dustproof


cover with copper stick.

Rotate wrench clockwisely 6. Dismantle main gear oil seal


Dismantle oil seal with special tools, and note do not damage
inner wall of decreased shell.

SST

7. Install new main gear oil seal


(a) Hit in new oil seal lightly with special tools.
SST
(b) Top surface of oil seal is horizontal with top surface of
decreased shell.
Note: spread lithium base lubricating grease evenly on
oil seal lip, and hit it correctly.

8. Install assembly of main gear flange and dustproof cover


(a) Head assembly of main gear flange and dustproof cover
in front drive main gear.
(b) Spread lithium base lubricating grease on new nuts.

(c) Lock flange with special tools, and screw nuts by


regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (140-160)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-76 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

9. Adjust pre-load of Driving bevel gear bearing


(a) Measure the pre-load in clearance of driving bevel gear
and driven bevel gear with torquemeter.
Pre-load: (1.2-1.7)N·m
(b) If pre-load exceeds regulated value, change it with thicker
washer.
Difference of washer with each-grade thickness: 0.03mm
(c) If pre-load is less than regulated value, change it with
thin washer, repeat this operation until it reaches
requirement.
33 Note: do not reduce pre-load with method of loosening
nuts.
10. Check axial and radial flopping quantity of flange
Measure the axial flopping quantity of flange with percentage
meter.
Maximal axial flopping quantity: 0.1mm

Unit: mm

Maximal radial flopping quantity: 0.1mm


If radial flop is too big, check the bearing.

11. Rivet main gear nuts after meeting those requirements


above.
12. Install retarder assembly on front drive axle assembly,
and install front shaft assembly.
(refer to page SA-68 and SA-103)
13. Install drain plug, then screw oil filler plug and fill hypoid
lubricating grease.
Drain plug screwing moment: (30-35)N·m
Lubricating grease type: GL-5
Filled quantity: equal to the lower edge of oil filler.
14. Underlay oil filler plug washer, and screw oil filler plug to
regulated moment.
Installing mark
Regulated moment: (140-150)N·m
15. Install front drive axle assembly on vehicle frame
16. Link transmission shaft on flange
(a) Head install marks rightly, then link transmission shaft
with front drive axle flange with four bolts and nuts.
(b) Screw nuts by regulated moment.
Regulated moment: (73-83)N·m
Remark: keep repair spot clean in the progress of repair.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-77

Disassembly of front reducer assembly

Front drive shaft assembly

Hanger plate-right 90-110 ★

Oil seal- front retarder


Snap spring
Bearing-front retarder
Snap spring
Assembly of front retarder and electric-control separator

Power tie-in of electric-control separator

23-26

Front drive axle ventilation pipe assembly

Snap spring
Bearing-front retarder
Snap spring
Oil seal- front retarder

Hanger plate-left

★ 90-110

Front drive shaft assembly

N ·m :Specified torque

★ Precoat parts

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-78 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

1. Support front part of vehicle, then dismantle left and


Installing mark right front wheel and beam under retarder.
2. Discharge lubricating grease in front retarder assembly.
3. Separate f ront retarder assem b ly f lang e from
transmission shaft.
Note: before disconnecting retarder and transmission
shaft, make installing marks on them.

4. Disconnect power tie-in of electric-control separator.

5. Unscrew the bolts on ventilation pipe bracket that are


used for fixing connecter assembly of front drive axle
ventilation pipe with wrench.

Wrench

6. Cut the connection of front drive shaft assembly and


Adjusting washer group steering knuckle-front wheel hub assembly.
(a) Unscrew the coupling bolts used for fixing front wheel
Snap spring hub cover, and take off front wheel hub cover.
★ Bolt

Flange plate
Wheel hub cover

(b) Dismantle snap spring from front drive shaft with snap
spring pliers.
(c) Disconnect steering knuckles on both sides, and separate
them from front drive shaft assembly.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-79

180 180

Tie-in of electric separator

7. Hold front drive axle with jack.


8. Dismantle lift bolts of front drive axle hanger plate and
vehicle frame.
9. Dismantle front drive axle assembly
Note: do not damage drive shaft or break front drive
shaft sheath.
10. Dismantle front drive shaft assembly on both sides from
front drive axle assembly.
Remark: keep repair spot clean in the progress of repair.

11. Dismantle the bolts and nuts used for fixing front retarder
shell with wrench.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-80 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

Change of front retarder assembly side oil seal and long half-axle oil seal

Change of front retarder assembly side oil seal


1. Dismantle front drive axle assembly
(refer to page SA-77)
2. Dismantle left and right front drive shaft assembly on
front drive axle.
3. Dismantle side oil seal and change with new side oil by
the dismantling and installing steps for front drive shaft
assembly, then harness new oil seal in front drive shaft
and install them in front retarder assembly
(refer to page SA-64)

90-110

23-26
Snap spring

Long half-shaft oil seal

Long half-shaft pressed assembly

Mechanical wheel of separator

N ·m :Specified torque

★ Precoat parts

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-81

Change of long half-shaft oil seal


1. After making electric clutch stay in four-drive statement,
stop vehicle and dismantle front drive shaft assembly.
(refer to page SA-7)
2. Unscrew the bolts on ventilation pipe bracket that are
used for fixing connecter assembly of front drive axle
Wrench
ventilation pipe with wrench.

3. Disconnect the connecter of electric clutch shell


Dismantle this position
ventilation pipe and front drive axle ventilation pipe
connecter assembly.

4. Disconnect the connecter of ventilation pipe on electric


clutch and connecter assembly of ventilation pipe.
5. Dismantle the bolts used for fixing electric clutch shell
and front axle pipe flange, and knock out electric clutch
shell with copper stick, then take out mechanical wheel
of separator.
Remark: lubricating grease will leak when separating electric
clutch shell and front axle flange, at this time, use vessel to
Dismantle this position
fill.

Mechanical wheel of separator

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-82 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

6. Disconnect snap spring used for locking long half-shaft


bearing exterior ring with snap spring pliers.

Shim plate

Bolt pins (two)

Ejection bolts (three)

SST

7. Dismantle long half-shaft and bearing, snap spring as-


sembly with special service tools

8. Dismantle long half-shaft oil seal with special service


tools
Note: do not nick inner surface of flange

SST

9. Scrape all seal glue on connecter of flange and electric


clutch with knife.
Note: do not nick connecting surface

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-83

10. Hit new oil seal in oil seal position in flange with special
service tools.
Note: it is necessary to spread some lithium base
lubricating grease evenly when installing new oil seal in
front lip, and hit oil seal rightly.

SST

11. Head spline of long half-shaft small end in that spline of


front retarder half-shaft gear lightly, then hit it in with
copper stick and hand hammer.
Note: do not damage roller pin bearing in long half-shaft
big end spline when hitting in long half-shaft.

12. Install snap spring in flange and lock bearing exterior


Snap spring ring with snap spring pliers.
Remark: if snap spring has been distorted heavily, change it
with new one.

Snap spring pliers

13. Clean the connecting surface of flange and electric clutch


shell with clean cotton cloth.

14. Arrange the spline in separator mechanical wheel, front


drive shaft and separator fork cover rightly, and install
them in front drive shaft and separator fork cover.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-84 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

15. Spread a sheet of 1596 silicon rubber flat sealant evenly


on connecting surface of flange, and scrape it flat with
flat plate.
Note: insure sealant is a continue bed, and it is necessary
to keep away from thread to avoid sealant enters in
thread hold when spreading.

16. Arrange fork cover and long half-shaft upper spline, and
make mechanical wheel of separator enter in long half-
shaft, then link electric-control separator shell and front
axle pipe flange with bolts, and screw them to regulated
moment. At the same time, pre-spread thread locker on
bolts (drip one to two drips at the middle of thread).
Regulated moment: (90-110)N·m
Remark: avoid abnormal things enter front drive axle when
installing.

17. Screw the bolts used for fixing ventilation pipe bracket
to regulated moment with wrench
Screwing moment: (23-26)N·m

18. Unscrew oil filler plug on electric clutch shell, take off
washer and fill in gear lubricating grease to oil surface
that equals to the bottom of oil filler.
Type of lubricating grease: GL-5
19. Harness washer of oil filler plug, and screw plug to
regulated moment.
Regulated moment: (140-150)N·m

20. Link the connecter assembly of ventilation pipe on


Link this position electric clutch shell and ventilation pipe of front axle
21. Link the connecter assembly of electric clutch ventilation
pipe and front axle ventilation pipe.

Link this position

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-85

Disassembly and installation of front reducer assembly and electric clutch part
Part drawing of front reducer assembly

Bearing gland
Adjusting male tab

90-115
Bearing

Differential shell 80-95 ★

Pin Stop shim of half-shaft gear

Half-shaft gear

Driven bevel gear Planetary gear shaft

Planetary gear

Assembly of front drive main gear


Front drive axle shell 18-25 ★
flange and dustproof cover
Washer Small bearing
Oil filler plug Oil seal

Ventilation pipe

30-35
★ 90-110
Spacer bush-driving
Front axle ventilation pipe ★ bevel gear ◆
connector assembly
140-160

Long half-shaft oil seal


23-26

Adjusting washer
Long half-shaft Snap spring
Roller pin bearing
Front reducer shell
Bearing
Electric clutch Ventilation
pipe Snap spring
Dowel pin

Oil filler plug

Big bearing
Washer Adjusting washer
★ 23-26 Electric clutch shell Driving bevel gear

Fork cover

N ·m :Specified torque
Mechanical wheel of separator
◆ Parts no longer for use after service
★ Precoat parts

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-86 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

Disconnect this position


Disassembly of front retarder assembly
Disconnect this
1. Dismantle front drive axle, left and right front drive shaft
position assembly.
(refer to page SA-64 and SA-77)
2. Dismantle those three connecting position of front drive
axle ventilation pipe connecter assembly.

Disconnect this position

3. Unscrew the bolts used for fixing ventilation pipe


connecter assembly with wrench and take off ventilation
pipe connecter assembly.

4. Unscrew the bolts used for fixing electric clutch, and


knock down electric clutch with copper stick.

5. Disconnect oil filler plug with wrench and take off washer,
then pull out ventilation pipe tie-in.

6. Disconnect the bolts used for linking electric clutch shell


and front axle pipe flange with wrench, then take out
fork cover and mechanical wheel of separator.
Remark: when dismantling, it is necessary to use vessel to fill
the leaked gear oil to avoid polluting environment.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-87

7. Dismantle the snap spring used for fixing long half-shaft


bearing exterior ring with snap spring pliers.
8. Pull out long half-shaft, long half-shaft bearing and inner
ring snap spring of long half-shaft with special service
tools.
(refer to page SA-90)
9. Dismantle long half-shaft oil seal with special service
tools
(refer to page SA-90)
10. Pull out ventilation pipe head on front axle pipe.

11. Dismantle the snap spring used for fixing long half-shaft
bearing inner ring with snap spring pliers.

12. Press out long half-shaft bearing on press (or hit it out
with hand hammer).
Note: do not damage spline on long half-shaft end.

SST

13. Pull out roller pin bearing in long half-shaft with special
service tools.
Note: it is necessary to use shim plate when using vice
to nip long half-shaft.

14. Dismantle the bolts and nuts used for fixing front retarder
assembly and front axle shell with wrench.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-88 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

15. Knock front retarder shell to separate it from front drive


axle shell with copper stick or hand hammer.

16. Check swing difference of driven bevel gear


Turn the flange, then measure swing difference of driven bevel
gear with percent meter
Maximal swing difference: 0.07mm
If swing difference exceeds 0.07mm, it is necessary to change
driving and driven bevel gear.

17. Check the clearance between gear sides of driving and


driven bevel gear.
(a) Install percent meter, and insure side head axle line is
vertical with contacting gear surface.
(b) Hold main gear flange, and turn driven bevel gear come-
and-go to measure clearance value.
Regulated range of clearance value: (0.15-0.25)mm
Remark: check over three even points on driven bevel gear
ring.

18. Check mesh moulage of driving and driven bevel gear.


(refer to page SA-97)

19. Measure pre-load of driving bevel gear bearing


Measure the pre-load of clearance between driving and driven
bevel gear bearing with torquemeter.
Pre-load range: (1.2-1.7)N·m
20. Measure total pre-loads of driving bevel gear

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-89

21. Dismantle the assembly of main gear flange and


dustproof cover
(a) Loosen riveted part of main gear nut with hand hammer
and chisel.

(b) Lock main gear flange to dismantle main gear nuts with
SST special service tools.

(c) Knock down assembly of main gear flange and dustproof


cover with copper stick.

22. Dismantle main gear oil seal with special service tools

Hold
SST

Pliers

Screw clockwise

23. Dismantle small bearing inner ring with special service


tools and overturn retarder to slide out spacer bush
Remark: if bearing has been damaged, change it with new
one.
SST

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-90 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

24. Dismantle two bearing pressed covers with wrench


Remark: distinguish left and right to avoid confusion when
dismantling bearing pressed cover.
25. Shake differential assembly upwards with copper stick,
then take out differential assembly.

26. Dismantle side bearing exterior ring and mark left and
right part.
L

27. Take down left and right adjusting washer, measure their
thickness and mark left and right

28. Take out driving bevel gear and adjusting washer under
spacer bush.

Inspection and change of retarder


1. Change big bearing of driving bevel gear
(a) Press out driving bevel gear big bearing with special
service tools.
Remark: if driving bevel gear has been damaged, change the
SST whole set of driving and driven bevel gear before changing
big bearing.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-91

(b) Install washer on driving bevel gear, and install new big
bearing with special service tools.
SST

2. Change big bearing exterior ring of driving bevel gear


(a) Knock down big bearing exterior ring with copper stick
and hand hammer.

(b) Press in new big bearing exterior ring with special service
SST
tools.

3. Change small bearing of driving bevel gear


(a) Knock down small bearing exterior ring of driving bevel
gear with copper stick and hand hammer.

(b) Press in new small bearing exterior ring with special


service tools.
(c) Change new bearing inner ring before installing small
bearing.
SST

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-92 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

4. Dismantle two side bearing inner rings from differential


shell
(a) Dismantle side bearing inner ring on the side with bolts
from differential assembly with special service tools.
(b) When dismantling bearing inner ring on the other side ,
note do not damage driven bevel gear which is nipped by
vice.
Rubber shim plate

5. Dismantle the bolts used for fixing driven bevel gear with
wrench
Note: before dismantling, make installing marks on
driven bevel gear and differential shell.

Installing mark

Rubber shim plate

6. Disassembly of differential assembly


(a) Hit out pin with hand hammer and special service tools
after dismantling driven bevel gear.

(b) Knock out planetary gear shaft, and turn half-shaft gear
to take out planetary gear, then take out half-shaft an
stop shim.

7. Installation of differential assembly


(a) Clean differential shell.
(b) Harness stop sheet of half-shaft gear in half-shaft gear,
then install them in differential shell.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-93

(c) Turn half-shaft gear, rotate to install it in planetary gear


and put through planetary gear shaft.

(d) Check the clearance of stop sheet of half-shaft gear and


differential shell.
If turning half-shaft gear and planetary gear flexibly, pull
planetary gear to inside, then measure the clearance of stop
sheet of half-shaft gear and differential shell with percent meter.
Proper range of clearance: (0.4-0.75)mm
If clearance value is not at the range above, it is necessary to
change half-shaft gear stop sheet and insure their thickness
on left and right sides is same.

(e) Hit in pin to forelock planetary gear shaft with special


service tools, at the same time, rivet the hit hole to prevent
pin from taking out.

SST

(f) Clean the surface of differential shell, and install driven


bevel gear on differential shell with copper stick.
Note: head the installing marks made in disassembly
when installing driven bevel gear, and hit in evenly on
circle direction, if there is any copper scrap on driven
bevel gear, remove it in time.

(g) Spread a sheet of thread locker on the bolts used for


fixing driven bevel gear, then screw them to regulated
moment.
Regulated screwing moment: (80-95)N·m
Note: when screwing bolts, it is necessary to accord with
the cross angle sequence, and screw them a little when
beginning, then screw to regulated moment evenly.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-94 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

(h) Press two inner rings of side bearing in bearing


SST
position on both sides of differential shell on press
with special service tools.

SST

(i) Put a adjusting male tab in side bearing position of


Bearing Bearing front retarder shell and place it near exterior side.
(j) Install the other adjusting male tab together with
bearing exterior ring on the other side in front re-
Adjusting Adjusting male tab tarder shell with differential assembly.
male tab

(k) Install left and right bearing pressed cover and


screw bolts to regulated moment with wrench.
regulated moment: (90-115)N·m

(l) Turn driven bevel gear, and check swing difference


of driven bevel gear.
Maximal swing difference: 0.07mm

Installation of front retarder assembly


1. Harness adjusting washer in driving bevel gear, and in-
stall big bearing inner ring of driving bevel gear.
2. Clean front retarder shell, and install exterior ring of big
and small bearing in retarder shell.
3. Install driving bevel gear in front retarder shell, then in-
stall washer, spacer bush and small bearing inner ring.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-95

4. Install driving bevel gear oil seal with special service tools.
Note: before instating oil seal, it is necessary to spread
SST
lithium base lubricating grease on lip, and rear plane of
oil seal should equal to top surface of front retarder shell
after hitting in oil seal.
5. Install assembly of main gear flange and dustproof cover.
(refer to page SA-74)

6. Tighten main gear nuts to regulated moment with special


service tools, and firstly spread lithium base lubricating
grease on nuts.
Regulated moment: (140-160)N·m

7. Measure pre-load of big and small bearing of driving


bevel gear with torquemeter.
Range of pre-load: (1.2-1.7)N·m

8. Put differential assembly on corresponding position of


front retarder shell.

9. Choose a adjusting male tab to insert one side with


exterior ring of side bearing, and pull differential
assembly to the side with adjusting male tab.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-96 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

10. Measure the clearance value of gear side between


driving and driven bevel gear with percent meter, and
choose the adjusting male tab on the side whose
clearance is 0.15mm.

11. Measure the thickness of this adjusting male tab.

12. After choosing this adjusting male tab, choose the


L1 adjusting male tab on the other side by the theoretical
L2
thickness of adjusting male tab on the other side equals
to that value which is calculated by the opposite distance
of front retarder two side bearing positions L1 minuses
the thickness of chosen shim, then minus the distance
of two side bearing exterior rings of differential assembly
L2.

13. Put a adjusting male tab in side bearing positions of


front retarder shell and press it close to exterior side.
14. Install the other adjusting male tab together with bearing
exterior ring on the other side in front retarder shell with
differential assembly.
Remark: insure there is no any clearance between chosen
adjusting male tab and front retarder shell.
15. Turn driven bevel gear to make differential assembly
close to front retarded shell.
16. Measure the clearance of gear sides of driving and
driven bevel gear with percent meter.
Proper range of clearance value: (0.15-0.25)mm
If measured clearance is not in this range, it is necessary to
increase and decrease thickness of male tab to adjust at the
same time.(If one side increase some thickness, the other side
should decrease the thickness with same number)
Remark: insure there is no any clearance between chosen
adjusting male tab and front retarded shell.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-97

17. Adjust pre-load on axial direction of side bearing


(a) Take off two adjusting male tab, and re-measure the
thickness of two adjusting mal tabs.
(b) Re-install new adjusting male tab whose thickness is 0.
06-0.09 mm more than dismantled adjusting male tab,
and re-install them together with differential assembly in
retarded shell.

(c) RE-measure the clearance of gear sides of driving and


driven bevel gear
Proper range of clearance value: (0.15-0.25)mm
If measured clearance is not in this range, it is necessary to
increase and decrease thickness of male tab to adjust at the
same time.(If one side increase some thickness, the other side
should decrease the thickness with same number)
Remark: insure there is no any clearance between chosen
adjusting male tab and front retarded shell.

18. Install bearing press cover on both sides and screw it to


regulated moment
Regulated moment: (90-115)N·m
Remark: distinguish left and right when installing.

19. Measure total pre-loads of f ront retarded w ith


torquemeter.
Regulated moment: (1.8-2.4)N·m

20. Check mesh moulage of driving and driven bevel gear.


(a) Spread three to four teeth with red lead independently on
three different positions of driven bevel gear.
(b) Hold main gear flange, and turn driven bevel gear come-
and-go.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-98 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

(c) Check the contacting situation of gear.


1 4
4 18-2 2
5 If mesh moulage of driving and driven bevel gear could not
5 15-2
5

accord with that shown in figure, choose proper adjusting


1.2
washer to amend by the concrete methods of mesh moulage.

Driven bevel gear convexity Driven bevel gear concave

Unit: mm

Big end contact Gear top contact

Choose the shim that could make drive small gear near driven bevel gear.

Small end contact Gear base contact

Contact is well

Choose the shim that could make drive small gear far from driven bevel gear.

(d) When changing washer, firstly dismantle driving


bevel gear, then dismantle big bearing of driving
bevel gear with special service tools.

SST

(e) Harness new adjusting washer and press it in big


bearing of driving bevel gear with special service
tools.
(f) Harness the adjusting washer of big bearing on
driving bevel gear, and install spacer bush in re-
tarded shell, then install main gear flange and screw
nuts to regulated moment.
(g) Re-measure the pre-load of main gear bearing
clearance and retarded assembly to make them
meet the requirement.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-99

21. Measure the axial and radial flopping quantity of driving


33
bevel gear flange with percentage meter.
Maximal axial flopping quantity: 0.1mm

Unit: mm

Maximal radial flopping quantity: 0.1mm


If flopping quantity exceeds 0.1 mm, it is necessary to check
big and small bearing of driving bevel gear.

22. Rivet nuts of driving bevel gear

23. Screw two dual-head bolts in corresponding thread holes


of front axle shell with gas-drive wrench to the end.
(Before screwing dual-head bolts, spread a sheet of
thread locker evenly on the thread of front axle shell
and the spread quantity should cover the thread on front
axle shell)
Remark: the position of dual-head bolt should accord with
that before disassembly.

24. Spread a sheet of continue 1596 silicon rubber flat


sealant evenly on connecting surface of front axle shell,
and scrape it flat with flat plate.
Remark: keep away from thread to avoid sealant enters in
thread hold when spreading.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-100 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

25. Install front retarded assembly on front drive axle shell,


and screw hexagon bolts and spring washer combination
part, then draw spring washer on dual-head bolts and
screw nuts to regulated moment. (Threads of all bolts
have been pre-spread thread locker)
Screwing moment: (18-25)N·m
Remark: tighten bolts evenly by relative bolts, and check
whether there is any clearance on contacting surface of
retarded shell and axle shell, and whether there is any rupture
of sealant. If having, dismantle retarded to re-install.
26. Harness oil filler plug on washer and screw it on front
drive axle shell.
Remark: do no screw tightly.
27. Screw oil drain plug on front drive axle shell
Regulated moment: (30-35)N·m
28. Install long half-shaft oil seal in front axle pipe with special
service tools.
Remark: pre-spread some lithium base lubricating grease evenly
on lip of oil seal, and install oil seal rightly.
29. Install roller pin bearing in long half-shaft with special
service tools.

SST

30. Install long half-shaft bearing with special service tools.


SST 31. Install snap spring to lock inner ring of long half-shaft
bearing with snap spring pliers.

SST

32. Head spline of long half-shaft small end in that spline of


front retarded half-shaft gear lightly, then hit it in front
retarded with copper stick and hand hammer.
Note: do not damage roller pin bearing in long half-shaft
big end spline when hitting in long half-shaft.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-101

33. Install snap spring to lock exterior ring of long half-shaft


bearing with snap spring pliers.

34. Pull mechanical wheel of separator in roller pin bearing


inner ring of long half-shaft until it could not be pulled.

35. Check the electric clutch assembly


(a) Measure the clearance value between fork and fork
cover.
Range of clearance value: (0.2-0.4)mm
If clearance value is not in this range, it is necessary to change
electric clutch assembly and fork cover.
(b) Link electric clutch assembly on electric clutch tester
and connect 220 volt power to electric clutch tester to
check electric clutch (before testing, adjust testing
controller to make electric motor start time is 3 seconds,
the time from finding executer has not on position to
starting again is 2.5 seconds, and the time when controller
re-drives electric clutch is 2 seconds), and electric motor
has started for 3 seconds when the shift switch converts
from two-drive to four-drive, at the same time, light
flashes, clutch reaches four-drive statement, indicating
light shines usually. If it has not reached four-drive
statement, after delaying 2.5 seconds, controller drives
it again for 2 seconds, at the same time, light flashes, if
it has not reached all the time, indicating light flashes
twice continually, indicating light extinguishes for 1
Electric clutch tester
second, electric motor stops, this shows electric clutch
is not eligible, it is necessary to change with new one.
When clutch switches from four-drive to two-drive,
electric motor starts for 3 seconds normally, at the same
time, light flashes, when clutch reaches two-drive
statement, indicating light extinguishes usually. If clutch
has not reached two-drive statement at first time, after
delaying for 2.5 seconds, controller drives electric motor
for 2 seconds, at the same time, light flashes, if it has
not reached two-drive statement , indicating light flashes
twice continually, then extinguishes for 1 second, electric
motor stops, this shows electric clutch is not eligible, it
is necessary to change with new eligible one.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-102 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

36. Harness fork cover on the spline of long half-shaft.


37. Install electric control separator shell on the flange of
front axle pipe, and screw it to regulated moment with
bolts.
Pre-spread a sheet of thread locker evenly on bolts, and its
dosage is that could cover all threads exactly.
Regulated moment: (90-110)N·m
Remark: before installing, clean the sundries on two connecting
surface of separator shell and front axle pipe flange, and pre-
spread 1596 silicon rubber flat sealant on front axle pipe flange.
At the same time, avoid sealant enters in thread hole.
38. Press in the plastic ventilation pipe on electric control
separator shell and front axle pipe.
39. Install two dowels in dowel hole of electric control
separator shell independently.
40. Spread a sheet of 1596 silicon rubber flat sealant evenly
on connecting surface of electric control separator shell
and electric control clutch, and scrape it flat with flat
plate.
Remark: connecting surface should be clean without any oil
dirt or other things, and sealant could not enter the shell chamber
and thread hole of electric-control separator.
41. Install electric-control clutch assembly on electric control
separator shell.
(a) Make fork bestraddle on fork cover.
(b) Head dowel hole of electric-control clutch to two dowels
and screw them with bolts, then screw bolts to regulated
moment.( Pre-spread one to two drips of thread locker
at the middle of thread)
Regulated moment: (23-26)N·m
42. Fix connecter assembly of front drive axle ventilation
pipe by bolts with wrench.

43. Link connecter assembly of front drive axle ventilation


pipe with the three interfaces of front axle pipe, electric-
control clutch and electric-control separator shell.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer SA-103

44. Unscrew oil filler plug of front drive axle shell and fill hypoid
gear oil in axle shell, then screw oil filler plug to regulated
moment.
Gear oil trademark: GL-5
Filled quantity: oil surface should equal to lower edge of
oil filler hole.
Regulated moment: (140-150)N·m
45. Fill gear oil in electric-control separator, then screw oil
filler plug to regulated moment.
Gear oil trademark: GL-5
Filled quantity: oil surface should equal to lower edge of
oil filler hole.
Regulated moment: (140-150)N·m

Installation of front retarder assembly


180
180

180

N ·m :Specified torque 180

1. Install front drive shaft assembly on retarder assembly.


(refer to page SA-72)

180 180

2. Support front drive axle with jack, and put on hanger


plate with washer, then screw them to regulated moment.
Remark: do not put on front two bolts wrongly.
Regulated moment: 180N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-104 Suspension system and vehicle axle — Front reducer

3. Link front drive axle flange and transmission shaft with


Installing mark
bolts by the marks made before disassembly, then screw
them to regulated moment.
Regulated moment: (73-83)N·m
4. Install the beam under front drive axle, and screw the
licking bolts of this beam to regulated moment.
Regulated moment: (73-83)N·m
5. Link power tie-in of electric clutch on power-output wire
of vehicle.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear axle shaft SA-105

Rear axle shaft


Part drawing

Rear braking drum Half-shaft assembly ◆ Spring washer


◆ Inner oil seal

100 ± 10

Rear axle shell

Half shaft Bearing seat Double row tapered


roller bearings
◆ Retainer ring

◆ Exterior oil seal Rear axle oil seal seat

Rear arrester

N ·m :Specified torque

◆ Parts no longer for use after service

Disassembly of rear axle shaft


1. Drain out gear oil in retarder
Unscrew oil drain plug at the bottom of axle shell, hold the
drained oil with clean vessel.
Remark: keep working environment clean.

2. Dismantle wheels
3. Dismantle rear braking hub
4. Dismantle handbrake bracing wire head from rear
arrester.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-106 Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear axle shaft

5. Dismantle half shaft assembly from rear axle shell


(a) Link half shaft flange surface with special tools by bolts.
SST
(b) Hold swimming hammer of special tools to impact it again
and again
Note: do not damage oil seal.

6. Dismantle retainer ring from half-shaft assembly


Dismantle retainer ring with lock pliers.

7. Dismantle half shaft from half shaft assembly


(a) Link the half shaft assembly with special linking plate,
and screw with nuts.

SST

(b) Put the assembly linking half shaft assembly with special
tools on press to press out half shaft.
(c) At the same time, dismantle oil seal seat of rear axle.
Remark: pressure of press=200KN, mileage=800mm.

Inspection and repair of rear axle shaft parts


1. Check the abrasion, damage and swing difference of
rear axle shaft and flange.
Radial maximal swing offset of shaft: 2mm
Maximal swing offset of flange end surface: 0.2mm
If rear axle shaft or flange has been damaged or worn, or
swing difference exceeds standard, change rear axle shaft.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear axle shaft SA-107

2. Check exterior oil seal


(a) Dismantle exterior oil seal with special tools, check
SST whether lip has been worn or damaged, and change it if
necessary.
(b) Note oil seal lip especially.
Note: do not damage oil seal when dismantling.

3. Check bearing
SST Check whether bearing has been worn or damaged, change it
if necessary.
4. Dismantle bearing
Press out double row tapered roller bearings with special
service tools.

5. Install new oil seal


SST (a) Clean the bearing seat.
(b) Spread proper HP-R lubricating grease on oil seal lip.
(c) Press in new oil seal with special service tools.

6. Change with new bearing


SST
Press in new bearing with hydraulic pressure machine.

7. Install assembly of new bearing seat (press in bearing


and oil seal)
(a) Put arrester assembly through half shaft, and put through
bolts-bearing seat.
(b) Install assembly of bearing seat, and install assembly of
bearing seat on half shaft.
Note: put bolts through the four bolt holes in assembly
of bearing seat, and head them rightly.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-108 Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear axle shaft

8 Install oil seal seat of rear axle


Install heated oil seal seat of rear axle on half shaft.
Requirement of heating installation: heat oil seal pressed seat
in 22# motor oil to 100, after heating all parts completely, take
out them to install immediately.

9. Install retainer ring


Install new retainer ring in the slot of half shaft with retainer
pliers.

10. Check inner oil seal of rear axle.


(a) Dismantle inner oil seal with special service tools, and
SST
check whether lip has been worn or damaged, then change
it if necessary.
(b) Note oil seal lip especially.
Note: do not damage oil seal when dismantling.

11. Install inner oil seal of rear axle


(a) Clean the flange of rear axle shell.
(b) Spread proper HP-R lubricating grease on lip of oil seal.
SST (c) Press in eligible inner oil seal with special service tools.
Installation of rear axle shaft
1. Install half shaft assembly in axle shell
(a) Clean half shaft and oil seal seat of rear axle.
(b) Arrange the half shaft spline with half shaft gear spline
correctly, then hit half shaft in axle shell with copper
stick.
Note: protect the assembly of oil seal lip and bracing
wire when installing, do not damage oil baffle sleeve
assembly, and head bolts of arrester to bolt holes of
rear axle flange.
Screwing moment:(90-110)N·m
2. Install handbrake bracing wire, and braking oil pipe.
3. Install rear braking hub
4. Try to discharge on braking system.
5. Install wheels

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear retarder SA-109

Rear retarder
Part drawing

Adjusting loop

Adjusting washer

Differential assembly

Driving bevel gear


Rear bearing 78-115
◆ Bearing spacer bush Dual-ear stop washer
Oil baffle disc

Dustproof cover

Flat washer

18-25

Front bearing Bearing cover


◆ Oil seal Stop sheet
◆ Nut
Flange

N ·m :Specified torque

◆ Parts no longer for use after service

Change main gear oil seal on vehicle


1. Drain lubricating grease in rear axle.
2. Take off transmission from retarder.
(a) Make installing marks on two flanges.
(b) Dismantle four bolts and nuts.

3. Dismantle the assembly of flange and dustproof cover


(refer to dissolving part of retarder)
4. Dismantle oil seal
Dismantle oil seal with special service tools.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-110 Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear retarder

5. Install new oil seal.


(a) Spread HP-R lubricating grease on lip of oil seal.
(b) Hit in new oil seal with special service tools.
depth of oil seal: 1.0mm
6. Install the assembly of flange and dustproof cover
7. Rivet the nuts of drive small gear

8. Link transmission shaft flange with retarder flange.


Installing mark
Arrange installing marks, then link them with bolts.
Screwing moment: 78N·m

9. Check oil level in retarder


Change hypoid gear oil if necessary.
Oil trademark: GL-5 grade hypoid gear oil
Viscidity: SAE80W/90
Dosage: fill oil until oil level equals to lower edge of oil
filler plug.

Disassembly of retarder
1. Dismantle oil drain plug, and drain the oil in retarder.
2. Dismantle rear axle shaft
(refer to page SA-105)
3. Cut off transmission shaft from retarder.
(refer to page SA-109)
4. Dismantle retarder assembly

Disassembly of retarder
Remark:
● If noise of differential is too big, before dismantling

differential to find its reason, make following inspections.


● If there is any serious problem in differential, dismantle it
to repair if necessary.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear retarder SA-111

1. Check the internal clearance of driven bevel gear


If internal clearance is not in that regulated range, adjust or
repair the pre-load of side bearing.
(refer to page SA-96)
Standard clearance: (0.15-0.25)mm

2. Check the contact between gears of driving and driven


bevel gear.
(refer to page SA-97)
Record the contacting position of gears.
3. Check the clearance between stop shim of half shaft
gear and differential shell.
Check the clearance between stop shim of half shaft gear and
differential shell with feeler gauge
Standard clearance: (0.45-0.75)mm
If clearance is not in that regulated range, change it with proper
thrust washer.
(refer to page SA-121)
4. Measure the pre-load of driving bevel gear.
Measure the pre-load of internal clearance between driving
and driven bevel gear with torquemeter.
Pre-load: (0.4-0.6)N·m
5. Total pre-loads
Measure the total pre-loads with torquemeter.
Pre-load: (1.8-2.4)N·m

6. Dismantle differential and driven bevel gear


(a) Make installing marks on retarder shell and cover of
differential bearing.
(b) Dismantle two stop sheets.
(c) Dismantle two bearing covers and two adjusting loops.
(d) Dismantle exterior ring of bearing.
(e) Dismantle differential from retarder shell.

Remark: make marks on dismantled parts to show their re-


installed positions.

L R

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-112 Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear retarder

7. Dismantle the assembly of flange and dustproof cover


SST (a) Loosen the riveted part of nuts with hammer and chisel.
(b) Lock flange with special service tools, and dismantle nuts.
Note: do not use the nuts again after this using.
(c) Dismantle the assembly of flange and dustproof cover
8. Dismantle oil seal
Prize out oil seal with tools.

9. Dismantle driving bevel gear and spacer bush


SST Dismantle driving bevel gear, bearing and spacer bush from
retarder shell.

10. Dismantle oil raffle disco and inner ring of front bearing

11. Change rear bearing of driving bevel gear.


(a) Pull out rear bearing from driving bevel gear with press
and special service tools.

SST

(b) Install re-used adjusting washer and new rear bearing


SST on driving bevel gear with press and special service
tools.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear retarder SA-113

12. Change of front and rear bearing exterior ring of driving


bevel gear
(a) Hit out front and rear bearing with hammer and copper
stick.
(b) Press in new bearing exterior ring with press and special
service tools.

13. Dismantle side bearing from differential shell


Pull out side bearing from differential shell with special service
tools.

14. Dismantle driven bevel gear


(a) Make installing marks on driven bevel gear and differential
shell.
(b) Dismantle linking bolts and locking sheet of driven bevel
gear.
(c) Knock down driven bevel gear lightly with rubber hammer
or copper stick.

Installation of rear retarder


1. Install bearing exterior ring of driving bevel gear
(refer to page SA-113)

2. Install driving bevel gear rear bearing and adjusting


SST
washer
(a) Refer to “mesh situation of driving and driven bevel gear”
to choose proper adjusting washer.
(b) Press in rear bearing and chosen adjusting washer with
press.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-114 Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear retarder

3. Install spacer bush


Spacer bush (a) Choose the adjusting washer between rear bearing and
spacer bush by experience.
(b) Install spacer bush.

4. Install front bearing inner ring, oil baffle disco and oil
SST seal of driving bevel gear
(a) Put front bearing inner ring in retarder shell, and put on
oil raffle disco.
(b) Spread lubricating grease on oil seal position of retarder
shell and lip of oil seal, and put oil seal rightly, then install
by press.

5. Install the assembly of driving bevel gear, flange and


Press flat dustproof cover
(a) Install the assembly of flange and dustproof in retarder
shell, and press it flat with hand.

(b) Put the driving bevel gear installed spacer bush, rear
bearing and adjusting washer through flange by spline,
then install nuts.
(c) Screw flange, flat washer and main gear with nuts.

6. Lock flange tightly with special service tools, and screw


SST nuts with torque wrench.
Screwing moment: (140-160)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear retarder SA-115

7. Measure turning initial tension of bearing


New bearing: (1.2-1.7)N·m
Re-used bearing: (0.4-0.6)N·m
If it does not meet the requirement, change the adjusting washer
under spacer bush until it meets the requirement.
Specification for torque wrench: (0-3.5)N·m
(a) If measured value is less than standard value, decrease
the thickness of adjusting washer;
(b) If measured value is more than standard value, increase
the thickness of adjusting washer;¡¡
8. Install driven bevel gear on differential shell
(a) Link driven bevel gear with differential shell with bolts
and locking sheets.
(b) Screw them for 3 buttons with hand, then screw them
properly with gas-drive wrench.

(c) Screw them tightly with torque wrench.


Screwing moment: (65-95)N·m
Note: screw bolts by transverse angle.

(d) Tighten locking sheets with hand hammer and flat head
punch.

9. Install inner ring of differential side bearing


Press inner ring of differential side bearing on differential shell
SST
with press and special service tools.

SST

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-116 Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear retarder

10. Install different assembly


(a) Dismantle bearing cover and distinguish left and right.
(b) Install differential assembly in retarder shell.

11. Install adjusting loop


Press bearing exterior ring rightly with adjusting loop, then
screw it properly. Adjust the clearance of main and auxiliary
gear to proper dimension.

12. Install bearing cover


(a) Head the installing marks on bearing cover and differential
shell rightly, and press the cover down with hand.
(b) Install dual-ear stop washer and nuts, and screw hexagon
nuts properly with gas-drive wrench.

Installing mark

13. Adjust mesh clearance of main and auxiliary gear


(a) Screw the four bolts on bearing cover with torque
wrench.
Screwing moment: (78-115)N·m

(b) Suck measure meter seat on end surface of retarder shell,


make its side head contact gear surface, then turn auxiliary
gear with hand and measure mesh clearance of main and
auxiliary gear

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear retarder SA-117

(c) If mesh clearance do not meet requirement, adjust left


and right adjusting loop with special service tools until
mesh clearance of main and auxiliary gear has met
requirement.

(d) Check mesh clearance of main and auxiliary gear again.


Mesh clearance: (0.13-0.18)mm

14. Check the contacting situation between driving and


driven bevel gear
(a) Spread four gears on the three different positions of driven
bevel gear with red lead powder.
(b) Turn driven bevel gear to two directions with hand, and
check the mesh of gear.

Big end contact Gear top contact

Choose the shim that could make drive small gear more
near driven bevel gear.

Small end contact Gear base contact

Contact is well

Choose the shim that could make drive small gear more
far from driven bevel gear.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-118 Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear retarder

f the contacting situation between gears is bad, choose


Rear bearing proper washer to amend by following table. Fair difference
Washer of washer thickness is ±0.01mm. Washer thickness (unit: mm)
Group number Washer thickness Group number Washer thickness
1 1.6 7 1.9
2 1.65 8 1.95
3 1.7 9 2
4 1.75 10 2.05
5 1.8 11 2.1
6 1.85 12 2.15
15. Install stop washer and stop sheet
(a) If mesh moulage of main and auxiliary gear could meet
requirement, lock stop washer with hand hammer and
punch.
(b) Install stop sheet, spring washer and bolts, and screw
bolts.
Screwing moment: (18-25)N·m
(c) Knock lower end of stop sheet in adjusting loop hole
with punch and hand hammer.
16. Measure total pre-loads
Pre-load: (1.8-2.4)N·m
If pre-load is not in regulated range, change the shim between
spacer bush and rear bearing until it could meet requirement.
(a) If pre-load is more than standard value, change adjusting
washer.
(b) If pre-load is less than standard value, screw nuts again,
and screw them slowly with less than 160N·m.
Note: when screwing nuts, if moment exceeds maximal
value, change adjusting washer and repeat the progress
of pre-adding load. Do not use the method that loosens
main gear nuts back to decrease pre-load.
17. Check and adjust the flop of flange
(a) Suck percent meter seat on retarder shell, and make
percent meter head contact with end surface of flange,
then turn the flange, at this time, mote observing swing
offset range of meter pin.
Total flopping fair difference of end surface: 0.10mm

(b) Suck percent meter seat on retarder shell, and make


percent meter head contact with inner pathway of flange,
then turn the flange, at this time, mote observing swing
offset range of meter pin.
Total flopping fair difference of radial direction: 0.10mm

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear retarder SA-119

18. Rivet the nuts of driving bevel gear

Installation of the assembly of rear retarder


and differential
1. Install the assembly of retarder and differential on rear
axle assembly.
(a) Clean the contacting end surface on axle shell for installing
the assembly, then spread silicon rubber flat selant evenly.
(b) Install the assembly of retarder and differential in rear
axle shell, then put on washer and nuts and screw those
nuts by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: (18-25)N·m
2. Install the assembly flange of retarder and differential
on flange of transmission shaft
(a) Head the installing marks, and link them with four bolts
and nuts, then screw them by regulated moment.
Screwing moment: 78N·m
(b) Install the assembly of half shaft and arrester, and adjust
braking oil way to make sub-pump of arrester fill with
braking liquid, then screw oil drain plug.
Screwing moment: (140-150)N·m
3. Fill in retarder with gear oil
Oil trademark: Oil trademark: GL-5 grade hypoid gear
oil
Viscidity: SAE80W/90
Dosage: fill oil until oil level equals to lower edge of oil
filler plug.
Screw oil filler plug
Screwing moment: (140-150)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-120 Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear differential

Rear differential (common type)


Part drawing

Planetary gear shaft


◆ Locking sheet
65-95
Tapered roller bearing

Straight pin

Half-shaft gear

Planetary gear

Differential shell

Half-shaft gear stop shim

Driven bevel gear

Planetary gear stop shim


N ·m :Specified torque

◆ Parts no longer for use after service

Disassembly of differential
1. Dismantle the assembly of retarder and differential
(refer to page SA-110)
2. Dismantle differential from the assembly of retarder and
differential
(refer to page SA-110)

Change of differential parts


1. Disassembly of differential
Hit out pin with hammer and punch. Dismantle planetary gear
shaft, two half-shaft gears, two stop shims of half-shaft gear
and two stop shims of planetary gear.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Suspension system and vehicle axle(Rear)— Rear differential SA-121

2. Installation of differential
(a) Harness stop shim of half-shaft gear in half-shaft gear,
then install them in differential shell.
Unit: mm

Group number 1 2
Thickness 1.2 1.5

(b) Install stop shim of planetary gear, then roll planetary


gear in differential and put it through planetary gear shaft.
Unit: mm

Group number 1 2
Thickness 0.8 1

(c) Check the clearance between stop shim of half-shaft gear


and differential shell with filler gauge.
If the clearance is not in regulated range, change it with
stop shim of half-shaft gear with different thickness.
Standard clearance: (0.45-0.75)mm

(d) Install straight pin


● Hit in pin by the hole on differential shell and
planetary gear shaft with hammer and punch.
● Rivet the pin hole of differential shell.

Installation of differential
1. LInstall differential assembly in retarder shell
(refer to page SA-113)
2. Install differential
(refer to page SA-119)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-122 悬架系统和车桥—后悬架

后悬架
元件图

钢板弹簧前销轴

180 ± 15
后吊耳挡板 180 ± 15

后钢板弹簧总成

后吊耳总成
U 形螺栓

后吊耳衬套
后缓冲块
U 形螺栓护板

后减振器固定垫片二
托瓦

180 ± 15
后减振器固定垫片一

后减振器

80 ± 10

牛 顿 · 米 :规定扭矩

钢板弹簧和减振器的拆卸与安装
1. 用千斤顶顶起车身并用架子托住
(a) 用千斤顶顶起车身并用架子托住。
(b) 将桥壳放低,直到板簧放松至不受负荷没有张力为
止,保持这种状态。

2. 拆下减振器

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


悬架系统和车桥—后悬架 SA-123

3. 拆下 U 形螺栓
(a) 拆下 U 形螺栓的安装螺母。
(b) 拆下 托瓦(弹 簧下 座)
(c) 拆下 U 形螺栓。
(d) 拆下 U 形螺栓护板。

4. 拆下钢板弹簧
(a) 拆下钢板弹簧前销轴固定螺母。
(b) 拆下钢板弹簧前销轴。
(c) 从支架上将钢板弹簧脱开。
(d) 拆下后吊耳总成和后吊耳挡板,拆下钢板弹簧。

钢板弹簧的更换
1. 将弹簧夹箍扳开
用凿子撬开弹簧夹箍。

2. 拆下中心螺栓
用虎钳夹住弹簧上靠近中心螺栓的地方,拆下中心螺
栓 。

3. 必要时,更换弹簧夹箍
(a) 用钻头钻掉铆钉头,将铆钉打出。
(b) 将新的铆钉打入钢板弹簧和弹簧夹箍的孔内。用压
力机进行铆接。

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SA-124 悬架系统和车桥—后悬架

4. 安装弹簧中心螺栓
(a) 对准钢板弹簧的中心孔,用虎钳夹住钢板弹簧。
(b) 装上和拧紧弹簧中心螺栓。
拧紧力矩:( 5 0 ± 5 ) N ·m

5. 将弹簧夹箍弯好
用榔头将弹簧夹箍弯到正确位置。

钢板弹簧的安装
1. 安装钢板弹簧
(a) 将钢板弹簧的前卷耳装入前支架内。
(b) 装上前卷耳销轴固定螺栓。
(c) 用手装垫片 Q401 14,并拧紧前卷耳销轴螺母。

(d) 将钢板弹簧的后吊耳装入后支架内,装上后吊耳总
成。
(e) 装上后吊耳挡板,用手指拧上螺母。

2. 安装 U 形螺栓
(a) 将上护板摆正放到桥壳上。
(b) 将 U 形螺栓装到桥壳上。
(c) 在钢板弹簧下面,将 U 形螺栓装入下托瓦孔中之后
再拧上螺母。
(d) 扭紧 U 形螺栓的安装螺母。
拧紧力矩:( 18 0 ± 1 5) N ·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


悬架系统和车桥—后悬架 SA-125

备注:交叉拧紧 U 形螺栓螺母,使所有 U 形螺栓伸出托


瓦下面的长度基本相同。

所有螺栓伸出长度基本相同

3. 安装减振器
(a) 先将减振器上端连接环装入车架的销轴上,并拧紧
螺母。
拧紧力矩:( 8 0 ± 1 0 ) N ·m
(b) 再将减振器下端连接环装入托瓦的销轴上,并拧紧
螺母。
拧紧力矩:(8 0 ± 1 0 ) N ·m
备注:安装减振器固定垫片一、二时,注意其方向,
应将垫片的凸面均朝向减振器。

4. 使后悬架进入稳定状态
(a) 装 上 车 轮 。
(b) 拆除架子,使汽车上下跳动几次,从而使悬架进入
稳定状态。

5. 拧紧前卷耳销轴和后吊耳销轴的螺母
上紧前卷耳销轴螺母。
拧紧力矩:( 18 0 ± 1 5) N ·m
上紧后吊耳销轴螺母。
拧紧力矩:( 18 0 ± 1 5) N ·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-1

Braking system
Page

Precautions ................................................................ BR-2


Troubleshooting .......................................................... BR-2
Overhaul of braking system ........................................ BR-6
Brake pedal ................................................................. BR-9
Parking brake control lever assembly .......................... BR-11
Vacuum booster with brake cylinder assembly ............ BR-13
Front brake ................................................................. BR-15
Rear brake .................................................................. BR-22
Loading sensing pressure proportioning valve ............. BR-30

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-2 Braking system — Precautions,Troubleshooting

Precautions
1. Always be careful when replacing each part, since any
error shall affect the performance of the braking system
and lead to accidents and dangers during running. The
parts to be replaced must be those of the same part No.
or type.
2. It is essential to maintain the cleanliness of each part
and position when repairing the braking system.

Troubleshooting
Trouble Causes Countermeasures
Pedal too Wear of brake shoe Replace the brake shoe
low or soft Wear of brake stop Replace the brake stop
Oil leakage of braking system Repair the oil leakage position
Failure of master cylinder Repair or replace the master cylinder
Existence of air in braking system Exhaust the air in the braking system
Failure of brake wheel cylinder Replace the brake wheel cylinder
Failure of rear brake automatic regulator Repair or replace the automatic regulator
Brake drag Inappropriate adjustment of parking brake Adjust the parking brake
Parking brake cable stuck Repair as required
Inappropriate adjustment of booster push rod Adjust the push rod
Failure of tension spring or return spring Replace the tension spring or return spring
Pipeline stuck Repair as required
Break up or deformation of brake shoe Replace the brake shoe
Break up or deformation of brake stop Replace the brake stop
Breakage of automatic regulator Replace the automatic regulator
Failure of master cylinder Replace the master cylinder
Braking Inappropriate inflation of tire Inflate the tire to appropriate pressure
distance a Oil stain or lubricant on brake shoe or brake Check and find out the cause,Replace the
little too stop brake shoe or brake stop (according to Job
large Instructions)
Deformation, wear or smoothing of brake shoe Replace the brake shoe
Deformation, wear or smoothing of brake stop Replace the brake stop
Deformation of brake drum or brake disc Replace the brake drum or brake disc
Failure of tension spring or return spring Replace the spring
Failure of wheel cylinder Repair the wheel cylinder
Failure of brake wheel cylinder Replace
Brake stop stuck Replace the brake stop (according to Job
Instructions)
Brake Oil stain or lubricant on brake shoe or brake Determine the causes and replace the brake
pedal rigid stop shoe or brake stop
Deformation, wear or smoothing of brake shoe, Replace the brake shoe
wear of brake drum
Deformation, wear or smoothing of brake stop Replace the brake stop
Failure of brake wheel cylinder Replace
Failure of brake booster Replace the booster
Inappropriate vacuity Repair or replacement as required
Brake pipeline stuck Repair or replacement as required

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Troubleshooting BR-3

Troubleshooting (continued)
Trouble Causes Countermeasures
Cracking or clatter (Drum brake)
sound is heard when Brake shoe stuck on flange of brake bottom plate Fill up lubricant
using brakes Wear of flange of brake bottom plate Replace the lubricant flange

Brake shoe compression spring loose or lost Replacement


Fixed bolt of brake bottom plate loose Tightening
(Disc brake)
Brake stop supporting plate loose or lost Replacement
Holddown bolt loose Tightening
Rustle or quack sound Wear of brake shoe lining or brake stop Replace it, if abrasion is serious,
is heard when using perform fine finishing on the brake
brakes drum or rotor
Interference between brake caliper and wheel or Replacement as required
rotor
Interference between dust cap and brake disc and Correction or replacement
between brake bottom plate and brake drum
Failure of other braking system parts Repair or replacement as required
Squeak, continuous Wear or abrasion of brake drum and brake shoe Check, repair or replacement
squealing, creak or lining, rotor and brake stop
vibrating sound is Defilement, oil stain or smoothing of brake lining Clean or replace it
heard when using or brake stop
brakes Improper use of brake lining or brake stop Check and replacement
Attention: friction Adjustment error of brake pedal or booster push Check and adjustment
matters of the brake rod
shall produce intrinsic (Disc brake)
noise and heat during Loss or damage of brake stop silencer sheet Installation for
friction, thus emitting complement/replacement
energies. Therefore, Brake stop abrasion indicator interfering with Replacement
the occasionally heard rotor due to wear of brake stop
squeak sound is Burrs or rusts on brake caliper Clean and remove burrs
regarded as normal. It (Drum brake)
shall become worse in Rigidity of brake shoe compression spring soft, Check, repair or replacement
bad environment, e.g. damaged or inappropriate, compression spring pin
coldness, torridity, and spring of brake shoe loose or damaged, and
high humidity, crack on flange of brake bottom plate
snowing, saltness or
mud. The occasional
squeak sound would
neither lead to fatal
error of the brake, nor
to degradation of
effectiveness of the
brake.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-4 Braking system — Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting (continued)
Trouble Causes Countermeasures
Continuous Adjustment error of brake pedal or booster push rod Check and adjustment
squealing and squeak Poor return of brake booster or master cylinder or Check, repair or replacement
sound is heard when wheel cylinder
brake is not working (Disc brake)
Piston rusting or stuck Check and fill up lubricant as
required
Improper position of brake stop inside brake caliper Repair or replacement
Friction of rotor cover against cover of brake caliper Repair or replacement
Inappropriate installation of brake stop supporting Repair or replacement
plate inside disc brake
Brake stop abrasion indicator interfering with rotor Replacement
due to wear of brake stop
(Drum brake)
Compression spring of brake shoe soft, damaged and Replacement
inappropriate
Crack on flange of brake bottom plate Repair or replacement
Interference between brake drum and bending or Repair or replacement
warping brake bottom plate
Inappropriate processing of brake drum which leads Replace the brake drum
to its interference with brake bottom plate or brake
shoe
Continuous Other parts of braking system:
squealing and squeak Loose or redundant parts in braking system Check, maintenance and
sound is heard when replacement as required
brake is not working Brake lining burnishing due to rear brake drum too Check, maintenance and
tight replacement as required
Wear, damage or insufficient lubrication of wheel Check, maintenance and
bearing replacement as required
Creak, clatter or Stones or foreign bodies involved in interior of Remove the foreign bodies, e.g.
cluck sound is heard wheel protecting cover the stones
when brake is not Wheel hub nut loose Tighten it to stipulated torque and
working replace it if bolt hole is expanded
Improper adjustment of brake pedal or booster push Check and adjustment
rod
Wear, damage or insufficient lubrication of wheel Check, oiling or replacement
bearing
(Disc brake)
Curling on brake stop supporting plate or brake stop Check, repair or replacement
outer end
Poor silencer sheet Check, replacement as required
Wear of sliding sleeve Check, replacement as required
Holddown bolt loose Check, tightening as required
Poor return of piston Check, repair or replacement
(Drum brake)
Parts loose or redundant Check it, take it off or repair it

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Troubleshooting BR-5

Troubleshooting (continued)
Trouble Causes Countermeasures
Serious leakage of master Oil leakage of master cylinder, wheel Eliminate leaking places
cylinder oil storage cylinder or hydraulic pipeline
Insufficient vacuum boost, no Vacuum leak of vacuum booster not in Check and replace the damaged
boost after engine flame out that operation parts
can lead to unstable idle speed Front and rear housing of booster unsealed Replace the vacuum booster
of engine when serious Front and rear air seal of booster out of Replace the vacuum booster
work
Leakage of vacuum cone way valve Replace the vacuum cone way
valve assembly
Brake pedal heavy, no boost Vacuum leak of vacuum booster not in Replace the front and rear air
effect operation seal and the booster diaphragm
Breakage of booster diaphragm Replace the vacuum booster
Breakage of control valve ring cup Replace the control valve
assembly
When stepping pedal several Compensate opening of master cylinder Check the brake fluid
times in a row, pedal changes jammed specification
successively till blocked Adjust the position of the hitch
yoke
Vehicles can not be stopped by Cable loose Adjust the self-locking nut of
pulling up manual brake the manual to strain the cable
Cable break Replace the cable
Breakage of cable cartridge or crack on Replace the damaged parts
balancing plate slot of manual brake
Damage of manual brake mechanism due to Replace the manual brake
incorrect manipulation mechanism
Parking brake indicator lamp is Parking brake indicator lamp damaged Replace the parts
not on Plug of manual brake switch loose Tighten the plug
Manual brake disconnected with its Fix the manual brake switch
foundation
Manual brake rusted or damaged Replace the manual brake
switch
Misplacement of control lever gripper Adjust the control lever gripper
Abnormal sound due to sway of Deformation of manual brake parts due to Replace the manual brake
manual brake incorrect manipulation

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-6 Braking system — Overhaul of braking system

Brake lamp switch


Overhaul of braking system
Pedal push rod Inspection and adjustment of brake pedal
1. Check that the pedal height is correct
Distance from pedal to lower front wall plate: 152mm
Distance from pedal to lower front wall plate: 152mm
2. Adjust the pedal height if necessary
(a) Disconnect the wire connector of brake lamp, loosen
the lock nuts and rotate the brake switch to screw it out
to such a position that it does not contact the brake pedal
limit block;
(b) Loosen lock nuts of the connecting control lever, rotate
the connecting control lever with slip joint pliers to make
the pedal height reach the standard value; after that tighten
the lock nuts, meanwhile ensure the spare working travel
Pedal height of pedal push rod is 1mm.
(c) Rotate the brake lamp switch until it contacts the brake
pedal limit block, then keep rotating for another 1/2 to 1
circle and tighten the lock nuts;
(d) Connect the brake lamp switch wire connector;
(e) The brake lamp should not be turned on when the brake
pedal is released.

3. Check the free pedal travel


Pedal push rod Free pedal travel: (4-6)mm
Step the brake pedal 2 to 3 times when the engine is off, then
push down the brake pedal after influence of the brake booster
is eliminated until pressure is met to measure the amount of
movement (free travel).
It must meet the requirements of the standard value.
4. Adjust pedal travel if necessary
(a) When amount of travel is incorrect, rotate pedal push
rod to adjust free travel.
(b) Confirm free pedal travel by starting the engine.
(c) Check pedal height after adjustment of free pedal travel.
(d) The relative front wall height difference between brake
pedal and clutch pedal is (0 to 8) mm.
(e) The relative front wall height difference between brake
pedal and accelerator pedal is (45 ± 5) mm.
Free pedal travel
5. When clearance between brake pedal shaft and bush
is too large, dismantle the pedal and replace

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Overhaul of braking system BR-7

Inspection and renewal of brake fluid hydraulic system;


Brake fluid affects directly brake performance and 5. Yardstick for completion of rinse: brake fluid that
operating condition and service life of braking system flows out of discharge valve is clear without dirt.
elements. It has a good hydroscopicity and tends to Emptying of hydraulic system
absorb water, thus can lead to corrosion of metal If brake fluid inside the whole hydraulic system is to
parts and deterioration of rubber parts. Deterioration be emptied, loosen all the air bleed screws with each
of brake fluid due to contamination or mix of different one inserted with a hose to let brake fluid flow into
brake fluids often causes boiling and gasification of the container, then slowly step the pedal until only
brake fluid and degradation of brake performance. air overflows. During the process ensure all the valves
Therefore when filling or renewing brake fluid open.
attention must be paid to: Air discharge of hydraulic system
1. The container for holding brake fluid must be
Hydraulic braking system must work in no air
capped and sealed;
condition, for any air that enters the system shall
2. As brake fluid is toxic and harmful to lacquer
cause soft brake or ineffective brake. When operating
finish, those spattered onto surface of vehicle
on braking system or whether there is air inside the
body must be wiped off immediately; braking system is not clear, it is essential to discharge
3. When water or other contaminants are found the air inside the system.
in brake fluid, and piston seal of master cylinder
1. Order of discharge
is already damaged, brake fluid inside braking
(a) When whether there is air inside the braking
system and all the rubber parts including brake
system is not clear, air discharge must be
hose bust be replaced.
performed on master cylinder first;£»
4. Correct brake fluid level inside the fluid (b) Then discharge other valves if installed;£»
reservoir shall be maintained between MAX and (c) Other order principles: discharge in turn from
MIN level.
the wheel brake that is farthest from master
Brake fluid level inside the fluid reservoir shall be
cylinder; the discharge order for vehicles with
checked after 1000KM running, and if the level does
steering wheels on the left: right rear wheel –
not meet the requirements, more brake fluid shall be
left rear wheel – right front wheel – left front
filled into the fluid reservoir until MAX level is wheel.For vehicles with steering wheels on the
reached. right: left rear wheel – right rear wheel – left
Overhaul of hydraulic element and front wheel – right front wheel.
rinse of system 2. Method for air discharge
1. If oil based solvent enters the hydraulic system, (1)Manual discharge
the whole system shall be rinsed and all rubber Take brake pedal and master cylinder as power
parts shall be replaced; sources, discharge brake fluid that contains bubbles
2. Wash hands clean before installation of new from the system when air bleed screws are loosened.
rubber parts or other elements; This is often completed by simultaneous operation
3. During overhaul or rinse of hydraulic elements, of two people with one stepping brake pedal and the
use of normal solvents (e.g. kerosene or other operating air bleed screws. During the process,
gasoline, etc.) is forbidden, and solvents that attention must be paid to:
can be used are confined to degreased alcohol (a) With ignition switch at off position, step the
or brake fluid; pedal for several times in order to remove the
4. After overhaul of elements, brake fluid inside vacuum reserved or hydraulic pressure;
the system shall be discharged, and after the (b) Fill clean brake fluid into master cylinder to
system is rinsed with new brake fluid, fill in new correct (stipulated) level before and after air
brake fluid and discharge the air inside the discharge;

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-8 Braking system — Overhaul of braking system

(c) Fluid level needs to be checked frequently in (d) Slowly press down the pedal and do not release
order to keep the volume of fluid reservoir above it, observe whether brake fluid that flows out
half of the total volume; of the joints contains bubbles;
(d) Air bleed screws shall only be loosened when (e) Tighten joints of brake line;
the pedal is stepped down, and tightened before (f) Let assistant release the pedal and wait for 15s;
the pedal is released, meanwhile observe (g) Repeat the above mentioned steps until air is
whether brake fluid discharged contains completely discharged;
bubbles; (h) Open joints of brake line at upper front end of
(e) System valves shall not prevent air discharge; master cylinder and repeat the above mentioned
(f) When brake fluid that flows out of hose or steps.
joint contains no bubbles, air inside the system ⑵ Air discharge of wheel brake
has been discharged, while if bubbles come (a) Check brake fluid level of fluid reservoir in
out of the hose inserted into brake fluid with master cylinder, fill more fluid when necessary,
pedal stepped down, air still exists in the system. check repeatedly and fill up in time during air
(g) Keep the free end of hose immersed in brake discharge;
fluid to prevent air from entering when screws (b) Place one end of air discharge hose on air bleed
are loosened; screws and insert the other end below the fluid
(h) During the process of air discharge, that gently level of some of the brake fluid;
knock the casting position of vibrating brake (c) Let assistant slowly step the pedal for several
device with rubber hammer is conducive to times until the pedal can not be pressed down
removal of deep layer bubbles of brake fluid; after successive rises and press feet against
(i) If whether there is air inside the braking system the pedal forcibly;
is not clear, air discharge must be performed (d) Loosen air bleed screws and observe whether
to master cylinder before that of wheel cylinder brake fluid that flows out contains bubbles, at
or brake caliper; the moment the pedal is slowly descending;
(j) Normally air discharge is performed on all the (e) When brake pedal is approaching travel end or
wheels; brake fluid flowing out contains no bubbles,
(k) Hoses for air discharge with cone way valve tighten air bleed screws;
may be used to prevent air from sucked into (f) Let assistant release the pedal and wait for 15s;
the system reversely. (g) Repeat the above mentioned steps until brake
⑵ Pressure discharge fluid flowing out contains no bubbles after air
Pressure air discharge device may be used for air bleed screws are loosened;
discharge of braking system if conditions permit. (h) Perform air discharge to all the wheels with
3. Order of discharge the same method;
⑴ Air discharge of master cylinder (i) Switch on the ignition switch after air discharge
As master cylinder has no air bleed screws, the of the whole system is completed;
following steps may be observed: (j) Check travel of brake pedal and counteracting
(a) Check brake fluid level of fluid reservoir in force of the pedal;
master cylinder, and add brake fluid when (k) Check the indication of brake alarm lamp, and
necessary; eliminate troubles or discharge air repeatedly
(b) Slowly open joints of brake line at upper front when necessary;
end of master cylinder until brake fluid flows (l) Complete air discharge by filling brake fluid
out from the opening; level of fluid reservoir to stipulated level.
(c) Reconnect brake line but do not tighten it;

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Brake pedal BR-9

Brake pedal
Part drawing
Brake pedal return spring
Brake pedal shaft

Welding assembly of brake pedal bracket


Brake pedal bush

Spring washer
Brake lamp limit block

Braking lamp switch


Nut

Welding assembly of brake pedal arm Pedal cover

Disassembly of brake pedal assembly


1. Dismount nuts and spring washer with hexagon wrench

2. Dismount brake pedal shaft, brake pedal bush, welding


assembly of brake pedal arm, brake lamp limit block,
return spring of brake pedal and welding assembly of
brake pedal bracket.

Grease coating
Assembly of brake pedal assembly
1. Coat interior of brake pedal axle tube and inner wall of
brake pedal bush, and mount the bush into brake pedal
axle tube.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-10 Braking system — Brake pedal

2. Mount pedal cover, brake lamp limit block and return


spring of brake pedal on welding assembly of brake
pedal arm.

3. Assemble welding assembly of brake pedal bracket and


the assembled brake pedal arm assembly with brake
pedal shaft, nuts and spring washer, and tighten them
with a 30N·m wrench.

Nut

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Parking lever assembly BR-11

Parking lever assembly


Part drawing

Handle

Self-locking nut

Control lever assembly

Switch

M4 screw

Cable assembly

Disassembly of parking lever assembly


Remark: parking lever is connected to rear parking brake cable
assembly through cable balancing plate, and mounted to vehicle
body floor through 3 connecting bolts, thus other operations
can only be made after the two connections are loosened.
1. Dismount handle
Grip the end of the handle and pull it out.
Remark: the handle and the control lever are bound together
by viscose, thus it is necessary to heat them for disassembly.

2. Dismount cable assembly


Special socket
wrench (M6) Screw special tools for self-locking nuts (M6 special socket
wrench) out of adjusting screw lever of cable assembly; then
Self-locking nut
dismount cable assembly from control lever assembly.
Remark: sealed cowling of cable assembly is connected to
foundation of control lever assembly through 2 barbs.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-12 Braking system — Parking lever assembly

3. Dismount switch
Screw off M4 screws that connect switch and foundation
with a philips driver, then pull out the switch.

Assembly of parking brake control lever as-


sembly
1. Assemble switch
Dismount parking brake switch and premount it in location
hole on foundation, then screw tight M4 screws that connect
switch and foundation with a philips driver.
Tightening torque:(2 ± 0.5)N·m

2. Assemble cable assembly


Special socket First let screw lever of cable assembly get through the square
wrench (M6) guide hole of guide plate on control lever assembly, then mount
Self-locking nut sealed cowling on foundation of control lever assembly with
2 barbs; finally screw in self-locking nuts with special tools
(M6 special socket wrench) and adjust them to appropriate
position.

3. Assemble handle
Coat the location where handle contacts control lever with
viscose, then nest handle on control lever.
Remark: control lever has a limit position for handle, thus
handle shall be nested to the bottom.

Technical requirement
1. Control travel of parking lever is (45 ± 1) degree.
2. Parking lever is mounted on floor with 3 connecting bolts.
Tightening torque: (23±2)N·m
3. Pulling up (8 – 10) teeth of parking lever shall have brake
effect.
4. Parking brake control handle force shall not exceed
600N.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Vacuum booster with brake cylinder assembly BR-13

Vacuum booster with brake cylinder assembly


Part drawing

Hitch yoke Lock pin


Spacer (riser block)

Pin shaft

Hitch yoke lock nut


Cup cap

Absorbing pad (shim)

Cup

Hexagon flange nut

Booster assembly

Vacuum alarm switch assembly

Hexagon socket cross recessed screw

Master cylinder connecting nut


Master cylinder assembly

Disassembly procedure of vacuum booster


with brake cylinder assembly
Attention: booster is connected and mounted to pedal
bracket on front wall plate with 4 lock nuts, and is
connected to pedal arm through pin shaft and lock pin
directly, thus pipe joint shall be screwed open with S10
open end wrench before dismantle of assembly, then
the connection of lock pin and pin shaft to pedal shall
be disconnected forcibly with pliers, and lock nuts be
loosened, after that operation of booster assembly is
Brake cylinder permissible.
assembly
1. Disassembly of assembly and master cylinder
Dismount two lock nuts with a hexagon head wrench, then
take off master cylinder assembly from booster and place it
on clean cardboard or soft cloth.
Booster assembly
Nut

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-14 Braking system — Vacuum booster with brake cylinder assembly

2. Disassembly of oil cup assembly and master cylinder


Oil cup assembly
assembly
Screw off cross recessed hexagon head screws with a philips
Slot driver, then pull out slots on the same side of oil cup from
dummy club of master cylinder directly with hands (here do
not overexert), and tilt oil cup in pull-out direction to
Cross recessed
Master cylinder
disassemble.
hexagon head
Dummy club assembly
screw

3. Disassembly of oil cup and oil cup cap


Screw off the cap from oil cup directly with hands.

Cup
Oil cup cap

4. Disassembly of vacuum alarm switch assembly and


Vacuum alarm switch assembly
booster
Screw off vacuum alarm switch assembly from booster
assembly (the two are connected by threads) with special tools.

Booster assembly

5. Disassembly of shim and riser block


Shim
As shim and riser block are directly placed on booster, they
can be taken off by hand.

Riser block

6. Disassembly of pin shaft and lock pin


This location needs to be opened by pliers
Forcibly open the end of lock pin with pliers, take out lock
Lock pin pin, then take off pin shaft from hitch yoke.

Pin shaft

Hitch yoke

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Front brake BR-15

7. Disassembly of hitch yoke


Hitch yoke lock nut
Hitch yoke When disassembling hitch yoke, please note first measure the
distance between center of hitch yoke and rear housing plane,
and perform assembly according to this distance. To screw
off hitch yoke from control valve rod, first put a shaft whose
diameter is a little smaller than that of hitch yoke hole through
Control valve rod the hole, then grip it and loosen lock nuts of hitch yoke with a
wrench.

Front brake
Part drawing
Copper washer
25-35
Brake hose bolt
Guide pin
50 ± 5
Guide pin gum cover
Caliper body
Anchor pin, guide pin dust cap
25-35
Front brake hose
Piston
Piston dust cap
Air bleed screw cap

7-10

Anchor pin

Rectangular seal ring Anchor pin, guide pin dust cap


Circlip sheet 2 of brake stop

Circlip sheet 1 of brake stop


Inboard silencer sheet compound piece

Tong hold
Inboard brake stop
silencer sheet

Alarm piece for wear limit of brake stop


Outboard silencer sheet
compound piece Circlip sheet 1 of Circlip sheet 2 of brake stop
N ·m : Specified torque brake stop Brake stop assembly

Replacement of brake stop


Remark: in the case of service brake, if continuous squealing
sound is heard from front wheels, check alarm piece for wear
limit of brake stop. In case trace of alarm piece rubbing brake
disc is found, brake stop shall be replaced.
1. Dismount front wheels

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-16 Braking system — Front brake

2. Check the thickness of brake stop friction material


Check the thickness of brake stop friction material through
sightglass on caliper body, and if it does not fall within stipulated
range, replace the friction material.
Minimum thickness: 2.0mm

3. Raise brake caliper body


(a) Dismount hexagon flange bolts

(b) Raise brake wheel cylinder and hang it up with ropes in


order to protect brake oil pipe.
Remark: do not unscrew brake oil pipe and air bleed plug.

4. Dismount the following parts:


(a) Two brake stops
(b) One silencer sheet
(c) Two silencer sheet compound pieces
(d) One alarm piece for wear limit of brake stop
(e) Four brake stop circlip sheets

5. Measure thickness of brake disc


(see page SA – 18)
6. Measure radial oscillation of brake disc
(see page SA – 18)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Front brake BR-17

7. Install brake stop circlip sheet

8. Install new brake stop


(a) Mount alarm piece for wear limit of brake stop on inboard
brake stop.
(b) Mount one silencer sheet and one silencer sheet
compound piece on inboard brake stop.
(c) Mount only one silencer sheet compound piece on
outboard brake stop.

(d) Install two brake stops to locate alarm piece for wear
limit at interior of brake caliper.
Attention: grease and paint contamination on working
surface of brake stop and brake disc are not allowed.

(e) Suck a small amount of brake fluid out of liquid reservoir


(to prevent brake fluid inside liquid reservoir from
overflowing).
(f) Press in the piston with special tools.

9. Install brake wheel cylinder


Install and tighten hexagon flange bolt.
Tightening torque: (25-35)N·m
Remark: replace brake stop on one wheel at a time to avoid
ejection of piston on the other wheel.
10. Install front wheels
Tightening torque of wheel fixing nut: (135 ± 15)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-18 Braking system — Front brake

Dismount of brake wheel cylinder


1. Dismount front brake hose
Dismount front brake hose, and hold the brake fluid with a
container.

2. Dismount brake wheel cylinder from caliper bracket


(a) Dismount hexagon flange bolt, anchor pin and guide pin.
(b) Dismount brake wheel cylinder

3. Dismount brake stop


(a) Two brake stops
(b) One silencer sheet
(c) Two silencer sheet compound pieces
(d) One alarm piece for wear limit of brake stop
(e) Four brake stop circlip sheets

Disassembly of brake wheel cylinder


1. Dismount piston from caliper body
(a) Place wooden block between caliper bracket and caliper
body.
(b) Align air gun or air pipe with brake oil pipe hole and
dismount piston from caliper body.
(c) Take out piston with clean duster cloth or other soft
cloth.
Warning: do not put fingers in front of piston when using
compressed air.
2. Dismount piston seal from caliper body
Use paper clips to dismount piston seal.
Attention: do not use sharp tools in order to avoid
scratching of piston seal.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Front brake BR-19

Inspection of front brake parts


1. Measure the thickness of brake stop friction wafer
Standard thickness: 9.0mm
Minimum thickness: 2.0mm
If the thickness is smaller than minimum thickness or trace of
uneven wear is found, replace the brake stop.

2. Measure thickness of brake disc


Standard thickness: 26.0mm
Minimum thickness: 24.0mm
If brake disc has scratching or abrasion, or its thickness is
smaller than minimum thickness, repair or replace brake disc.

3. Measure radial oscillation of brake disc


Remark: confirm that bearing has been correctly adjusted
before measurement.
Maximum radial oscillation: 0.11mm

4. Replace brake disc if necessary


(a) Dismount caliper bracket from steering knuckle.
(b) Dismount wheel hub and brake disc.
(c) Install new brake disc and tighten connecting bolts
according to stipulated torque.
Tightening torque: (90-100)N·m
(d) Install wheel hub and brake disc assembly
(e) Mount caliper bracket on steering knuckle and screw
tight the bolts according to stipulated torque.
Tightening torque: (140±10)N·m

Assembly of brake wheel cylinder


1. Preparation
All parts shall be cleaned and dried to eliminate impurities before
assembly. During assembly, coat guide pin and anchor pin
with vacuum silicon-based grease of appropriate amount; and
coat working surface of piston and rectangular seal ring with
rubber lubricant of appropriate amount.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-20 Braking system — Front brake

2. Install piston seal in caliper body


(a) Screw air bleed screw into air bleed hole of caliper
body.
Tightening torque: (7-10)N·m
(b) Put rectangular seal ring into two – cylinder seal
groove of caliper body after coating its working
surface with rubber lubricant of appropriate
amount.

3. Install piston with dust cap into caliper body


(a) Nest dust cap on piston.
(b) Elongate dust cap and let its edge clamping ring
come out from under the bottom of piston; slip the
edge clamping ring into edge clamping ring slot of
cylinder hole with tools (e.g.: iron wire about Ф
2mm).
Attention: do not use sharp tools in order to avoid
scratching of dust cap.
(c) Then press piston against bottom of cylinder hole
by hand.
4. Mount guide pin and anchor pin on caliper bracket
(a) Mount guide pin dust cap on guide pin and anchor
pin respectively.
(b) Screw guide pin and anchor pin into caliper bracket
respectively.
Attention: do not break guide pin dust cap.

Installment of brake caliper


1. Install brake stop

2. Install brake wheel cylinder


(a) Install brake wheel cylinder.
(b) Install and tighten hexagon flange bolt.
Tightening torque: (25-35)N·m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Front brake BR-21

3. Connect front brake hose


Connect front brake hose with caliper body.
Tightening torque: (50±5)N·m

4. Fill liquid reservoir of brake with brake fluid and


discharge air in braking system.

5. Check there is no leakage of brake fluid


Attention: discharge air after replacement.
(see page BR -6)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-22 Braking system — Rear brake

Rear brake
Part drawing

Wheel cylinder assembly

◆ Drawing arm grip ring


Elastic washer Self – regulating dial piece
Dial piece anchor pin
◆ Elastic shield ring
Return Clearance
Rubber blanking spring
cover adjusting
mechanism
assembly

Compression
spring nutted rod

Brake bottom plate Dial piece


Brake shoe adjusting spring
Brake shoe assembly adjusting
tension spring
Drawing arm pin

Compression spring
Brake drawing arm assembly

N ·m :Specified torque Brake drum

◆ Parts no longer for use after service

Dismount of rear brake


1. Check the thickness of brake shoe lining
Dismount sightglass plug˘ńand check the thickness of brake
shoe lining through the sightglass. If the thickness is smaller
than minimum value, replace brake shoe.
Minimum thickness: 1.5mm

2. Dismount rear wheels

3. Dismount brake drum


Remark: in case brake drum is difficult to dismount, take the
following measures:
(a) Dismount rubber blanking cover, then insert slotted
screwdriver into the hole on brake bottom plate to pry
self – regulating dial piece away from clearance adjusting
wheel.
(b) Use another slotted screwdriver to screw clearance adjusting
wheel in order to release adjuster of brake shoe assembly.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Rear brake BR-23

4. Dismount brake shoe strap drawing arm assembly and


brake shoe strap dial piece assembly
(a) Dismount compression spring on brake shoe strap
drawing arm assembly and brake shoe strap dial piece
assembly respectively, press down compression spring
and rotate it, release when square hole of compression
spring turns parallel with head of compression spring
nutted rod, then dismount compression spring.

(b) Dismount adjusting tension spring from brake shoe strap


dial piece assembly.

(c) Dismount return spring and clearance adjusting


mechanism assembly and brake shoe tension spring from
brake shoe strap drawing arm assembly, then dismount
brake shoe strap dial piece assembly.

(d) Dismount parking brake cable from rear shoe.


(e) Dismount brake shoe strap drawing arm assembly.

5. Disassembly of return spring and clearance adjusting


mechanism assembly
(a) Dismount head of clearance adjusting shaft.
(b) Dismount clearance adjusting wheel.
(c) Dismount return spring.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-24 Braking system — Rear brake

6. Dismount brake drawing arm assembly


(a) Dismount grip ring of drawing arm with pliers.
(b) Dismount washer.
(c) Dismount drawing arm pin.
(d) Dismount brake drawing arm assembly

7. Dismount self – regulating dial piece


(a) Dismount elastic shield ring with pliers.
(b) Dismount dial piece anchor pin.
(c) Dismount self – regulating dial piece.

8. Dismount brake wheel cylinder


(a) Dismount brake pipeline. Clog pipeline with clean plug.
(b) Dismount wheel cylinder assembly by dismounting two
bolts.

9. Dismount the following parts from wheel cylinder


assembly
(a) Two wheel cylinder shields.
(b) Two pistons.
(c) Two piston cup.
(d) Spring.
(e) Air bleed plug.
(f) Air bleed cap.

Inspection and repair of brake parts


1. Check disassembled parts
Check disassembled parts are not worn, rusted and damaged.

2. Measure inner diameter of brake drum


Standard inner diameter: 295.0mm
Maximum inner diameter: 297.0mm

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Rear brake BR-25

3. Measure the thickness of brake shoe lining


Standard thickness: 5.5mm
Minimum thickness: 1.5mm
Brake shoe shall be replaced if its thickness is smaller than
minimum thickness or uneven wear is found.
Remark: if one of brake shoes needs replacing, all rear brake
shoes shall be replaced in order to maintain consistent brake
performance.

4. Test whether brake shoe lining contacts well with brake


drum
In case that brake shoe lining does not contact brake drum
well, replace brake shoe assembly.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-26 Braking system — Rear brake

Assembly of rear brake

Note: assemble parts according to direction indicated in the figure

Front Front

Left wheel right wheel

1. Assemble brake wheel cylinder


(a) Coat two piston cups with lithium soap based glycol grease
of appropriate amount.
(b) Assemble brake wheel cylinder.
·Mount two piston cups on two pistons.
·Mount two wheel cylinder shields on two pistons.
·Install spring and two piston components into wheel
cylinder body.
Remark: perform correct assembly according to direction
indicated in the figure.
2. Install brake wheel cylinder
(a) Mount wheel cylinder assembly on brake bottom plate
using two bolts.
Tightening torque: (6.5-10)N·m
(b) Connect brake pipeline to wheel cylinder assembly.
Tightening torque: (16±2)N·m

3. Coat the following parts with lithium soap based grease


of appropriate amount
(a) Coat six boss plane where bottom plate contacts brake
shoe with lithium soap based grease of small amount.
(b) Coat brake shoe strap drawing arm assembly and brake
shoe strap dial piece assembly with lithium soap based
grease of small amount (see the area indicated by arrows
in the figure).
Remark: do not contaminate brake shoe lining.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Rear brake BR-27

(c) Put return spring through clearance adjusting screw lever,


and coat thread and screw lever of clearance adjusting
wheel, head of clearance adjusting shaft and clearance
adjusting screw lever (see locations indicated by arrows
in the figure) with lithium soap based grease of
appropriate amount.

4. Mount brake drawing arm assembly on brake shoe


assembly
(a) Install parking brake drawing arm assembly and put it
through drawing arm pin.
(b) Nest new elastic washer on drawing arm pin.
(c) Install a new grip ring into drawing arm pin with pliers.

5. Mount self – regulating dial piece on rear brake shoe


(a) Install dial piece anchor pin.
(b) Nest self – regulating dial piece on dial piece anchor pin.
(c) Install a new elastic grip ring into dial piece anchor pin
with pliers.

6. Install brake shoe cable and brake shoe strap drawing


arm assembly
(a) Mount brake cable on brake drawing arm assembly.

(b) Mount brake shoe tension spring on rear brake shoe.


(c) Mount rear brake shoe and insert shoe end into brake
wheel cylinder.
Attention: do not let oil or grease stain brake shoe.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-28 Braking system — Rear brake

7. Install brake shoe strap dial piece assembly


(a) Mount brake shoe tension spring between brake shoe
strap drawing arm assembly and brake shoe strap dial
piece assembly.
(b) Install brake shoe strap dial piece assembly and insert
shoe end into wheel cylinder assembly.
Attention: do not let oil or grease stain brake shoe lining.

8. Install return spring and clearance adjusting mechanism


assembly
(a) Install head of clearance adjusting shaft into brake shoe
strap dial piece assembly and mount return spring on it.
(b) Mount clearance adjusting screw lever and return spring
on brake shoe strap drawing arm assembly.
Attention: ensure head of clearance adjusting shaft prop
against self – regulating dial piece.

9. Install dial piece adjusting spring


Hook one end of dial piece adjusting tension spring on self –
regulating dial piece, and mount the other end on brake shoe
strap dial piece assembly.

10.Install compression spring


Put compression spring through its nutted rod, press down
and rotate it, then block head of compression spring nutted
rod in compression spring groove.

11.Check operating process of self – regulating mechanism


(a) Check self – regulating screw lever to see whether
it rotates by moving parking lever of rear brake shoe
in directions indicated in the figure. If it can not
rotate, find out which part of rear brake has an
error.
(b) Adjust the length of adjusting mechanism to make
it as short as possible.
(c) Install brake drum.
(d) Pull parking lever to its maximum travel until rattle
sound is not heard.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Rear brake BR-29

12. Check clearance between brake shoe and brake drum


(a) Dismount brake drum.
(b) Measure inner diameter of brake drum and outer diameter
of brake shoe, and confirm whether the difference
between them falls within standard range.
Clearance of shoe: 0.6mm
If the clearance is not correct, check parking brake system.

13. Install rear wheels


Tightening torque: (135±15)N·m

14. Fill liquid reservoir of brake with brake fluid and


discharge air in braking system
15. Check there is no leakage of brake fluid

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BR-30 Braking system — Loading sensing pressure proportioning valve

Loading sensing pressure proportioning valve


Assembly relationship drawing

Lower bracket of loading sensing pressure proportioning valve Loading sensing pressure
proportioning valve assembly

Hexagon flange bolt Upper bracket of loading sensing


pressure proportioning valve

Tube bank fixing bracket

Disassembly and assembly of loading


sensing pressure proportioning valve
1. Place vehicles on lifting support and prop them up (or
perform this in the pit)
2. Disconnect brake pipeline connections (3) on valve body

3. Dismount lock nuts on loading sensing pressure


proportioning valve, and adjusting bolts from lower
bracket

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Braking system — Loading sensing pressure proportioning valve BR-31

4. Dismount holddown bolts (2) and take off loading sensing


pressure proportioning valve assembly
5. Perform repair or other overhauls
6. Mount loading sensing pressure proportioning valve on
bracket with holddown bolts
7. Mount adjusting bolts on lower bracket and screw tight
lock nuts
8. Connect each brake pipeline and tighten joint
9. Fill up brake fluid, discharge air in the system, and check
brake pressure and leakage

Technical requirement
1. Elongation indicator of loading sensing pressure
proportioning valve L1 (center distance between hooks
at both ends)
L2 L1 L1: 210MM (no load) – 240mm (full load)
2. Adjustment range of bracket L2
L2:20mm
3. Tightening torque at joint of brake pipeline: (16 ± 2)N·
m

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SR-1

Steering system
Page

Precautions ................................................................ SR-2


Troubleshooting .......................................................... SR-2
On-vehicle inspection.................................................. SR-3
Steering driving device ................................................ SR-4
Hydraulic power steering system ................................ SR-6

SR

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 ÿwww.fineprint.com.cn


SR-2 Steering system — Precautions,Troubleshooting

Precautions
Always be careful when replacing each part, since any
error shall affect the performance of the steering system
and lead to accidents and dangers during running.

Troubleshooting
Trouble Causes Remedy
Poor returnability 1. Insufficient tire pressure 1. Inflate the tire
2. Change of front wheel alignment 2. Remeasure it and adjust front wheel alignment
3. Steering valve clogged parameters
4. Degradation of performance of 3. Inspect and replace steering gear parts
steering valve torsion bar 4. Replace the steering gear
5. Steering drive pair too tight
5. Replace the drive pair
Steering heavy 1. Low tire pressure 1. Inflate the tire according to standard air pressure
2. Knuckle too tight 2. Inspect knuckle clearance and lubricate the
knuckle
3. Steering gear too tight 3. Inspect and adjust gear and rack clearance
4. Inaccurate front wheel alignment 4. Adjust front wheel alignment
5. Hydraulic system lacking oil 5. Check liquid level in fluid reservoir and replenish
steering fluid as specified
6. Air left in hydraulic system 6. Inspect seal of each oil pipe joint, discharge air
and check liquid level
7. Insufficient oil supply of steering 7. If there is serious internal leakage due to wear of
pump oil pump, replace the steering pump;
if leakage is caused by too low oil viscosity,
replace the steering fluid with qualified new one.
8. Steering drive pair too tight 8. Inspect and adjust meshing clearance of gear and
fill up grease
One way direction 1. Insufficient tire pressure at one 1. Inflate the tire
heavy side
2. Steering gear valve deviated from 2. Repair or replace the steering gear
middle position
3. Left or right fixed pressure 3. Replace the seals
impossible to set up

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Steering system — On-vehicle inspection SR-3

On-vehicle inspection
Steering wheel inspection
1. Check steering wheel for clearance or clattering sound.
a
Steering wheel play “a”: (0-30) mm
2. Check to see if bolts and nuts are tightened. Then tighten
them if necessary. If damaged parts are found, repair
or replace them.

Inspection of tension of drive belt


Tension of drive belt: when a 98N force is applied
New belt: (5-7) mm
Tension bolt Old belt: (7-9) mm
Remark:
● “New belt” means its use on the machine does not
exceed 5 minutes.
● “Old belt” means its use on the machine exceeds 5
minutes.
Hexagon hole bolt Inspection and filling of power steering
Fluid
reservoir fluid
Power steering oil pump Hose 1. Park vehicles on flat ground.
2. Check liquid level in oil reservoir is between upper and
Hose
lower scale.
Oil outlet pipe of steering gear
3. Vehicles shall be inspected and filled with hydraulic oil
Reservoir support
for every 6000Km mileage or 3 months.
Oil return pipe of steering gear 4. Replacement of hydraulic oil and exhaust:
(a) Open the cover of oil reservoir, dismount the oil return
hose on oil reservoir and discharge oil to container.
(b) Start the engine and set it to idle. Discharge oil, meanwhile
turn steering wheel to left and right limit positions for
several times until oil inside steering system is completely
discharged.
(c) Shut down the engine.
(d) Install oil return hose and fill new hydraulic oil in oil
reservoir.
(e) Restart the engine and set it to idle, then turn steering
wheel to left and right limit positions for several times,
meanwhile fill oil reservoir with new hydraulic oil until
no foams or feculence are found in oil reservoir. Ensure
liquid level in oil reservoir stays between upper and lower
scale when the engine is shut down.
(f) Screw tight the cover of oil reservoir.
When steering or refilling hydraulic oil, steering wheel
shall not stay at limit positions for more than 5 minutes
in order to avoid damage of steering system.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SR-4 Steering system — Steering driving device

Steering driving device


Part drawing

Steering wheel body assembly

Rubber joint Steering column assembly

Coupling
Steering wheel cover sheet assembly
Middle drive shaft
Fixed bolt of cover sheet

Lower drive shaft


55 ± 5

Steering drive pair

Hexagon hole bolt


55 ± 5 Flexible universal joint

Seal washer
25 ± 3 Steering fluid reservoir

Hose

Power steering pump assembly


Low pressure pipeline
High pressure pipeline

◆ shape rubber sealing ring

Power steering gear assembly

90 ± 10
N ·m :Specified torque
◆ Parts no longer for use after service

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Steering system — Steering driving device SR-5

Technical requirement
1. Tightening torque of holddown bolts of power steering
gear assembly is (90 ± 10)N.m
2. Tightening torque of connecting bolts between steering
drive pair assembly and power steering gear assembly
is (25 ± 3)N·m
3. Tightening torque of connecting bolts between steering
drive pair assembly and left side member of the frame
is (55 ± 5)N·m
4. Tightening torque of hexagon hole bolts of power
steering pump and high pressure pipe is 30N·m
5. Tension of 4PK1100 multi-wedge belt is (500 ± 50)N
6. Centering of steering wheel: put front wheels right ahead,
take off steering wheel without changing position of
steering rod, then install steering wheel in alignment with
the center. At this moment webs of steering wheel shall
be symmetric on the left and right, and the Changcheng
logo on steering wheel shall be at the front view position
of the driver. Tighten the nuts, here tightening torque is
(25-35)N·m
7. Inspection of steering wheel free clearance
When steered to the right direction, and engine is flamed out,
apply a force of about 5N to steering wheel along its
circumferential direction to turn it to the left, and if resistance
is generated and is increasing, stop applying the force; then
turn steering wheel to the right, if resistance is generated and
is increasing, stop applying the force; the measured value of
the angle turned of circumference of steering wheel is regarded
as free clearance of steering wheel which shall be smaller
than 20°. Angles to right from middle position shall not exceed
10°.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


SR-6 Steering system — Hydraulic power steering system

Hydraulic power steering system


Control valve

Fuel pipe

Power steering gear assembly Power steering oil pump


assembly

Fluid reservoir

Steering system and power steering principle


Power steering system consists of steering oil pump, fluid
res ervoir , power st eering gear and oil pi pe.
With the aid of belt drive, the engine drives steering oil pump
to produce hydraulic pressure. Hydraulic pressure is applied
Oil return chamber on the piston of power steering gear which generates a auxiliary
Valve core Connected to force to push the rack of steering gear. The value of this
one side of
hydraulic
auxiliary force depends on pressure on the piston. Variation of
cylinder piston pressure is completed by control valve in steering gear.
Straight driving condition
Pressure oil
In straight driving condition control valve core in power
steering gear does not move and stays in middle position.
Torsion bar
Connected to the other side of hydraulic cylinder piston
Hydraulic oil supplied by oil pump does not flow to hydraulic
cylinder but returns to oil reservoir through the loop directly
Connected to from control valve. At this moment pressure on both sides of
Valve core one side of piston of steering gear is equivalent, and piston shall not move.
hydraulic
Oil return cylinder piston Steering process
chamber
When turning steering wheel, torsion bar in control valve shall
be twisted and deformed, and control valve core that is
connected to torsion bar shall rotate accordingly. Open oil
Torsion bar Pressure oil channel at one side and close oil channel at the other side, let
Connected to the other side of hydraulic cylinder piston hydraulic oil flow to one side of hydraulic cylinder to activate
the piston, thus realizing front wheel steering by moving of
racks.

Return process
After steering is completed, the force on steering wheel shall
disappear, deformed torsion bar shall recover its original shape,
and control valve core shall also turn back to middle position.
Hydraulic oil supplied by oil pump does not flow to hydraulic
cylinder but returns to oil reservoir through the loop directly
from control valve. At this moment pressure on both sides of

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Steering system — Hydraulic power steering system SR-7

piston is equivalent. In the presence of front wheel alignment


parameters, vehicles shall return to straight driving
automatically. During the process of returning to straight
driving, the piston moves and oil at one side of the piston
flows to the other side through control valve channel.

Road feel effect


Road feel effect refers to drivers’ feeling of steering resistance
on road surface when steering. When the driver applies forces
on steering wheel, torsion bar shall be deformed. The larger
the steering resistance on road surface, the heavier deformation
the torsion bar. In order to protect torsion bar from damage,
limit mechanism is installed. When deformation of torsion bar
reaches a certain degree, limit mechanism shall functions, so
that torsional force is transferred to steering gear then rack no
longer through torsion bar but directly through valve core. At
the moment steering resistance on road surface is directly
transferred to drivers without torsion bar as a media. Therefore
drivers may judge variation of resistance according to
resistance on steering wheel.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BE-1

Vehicle body electrical system


Page

Instruction for electrical system ................................... BE-2


Wire harness .............................................................. BE-3
Exploded view of vehicle circuit ................................... BE-9
Central door lock ......................................................... BE-19
Audio system .............................................................. BE-22

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BE-2 Vehicle body electrical system — Instruction for electrical system

Instruction for electrical system


Vehicle body electrical system is basically the same as that of “Hover”. Front headlights are converted to 2 high
beam lights, and air bag is also an option. In order to facilitate understanding of details of this section, apart from
schematic diagram of operating principles of electrical equipment provided, schematic diagram of connection of wire
harnesses and relevant plug-in units and terminal box are also introduced. Where the terminal box inside engine room
is labeled No.1, while that inside instrument panel labeled No.2. The following instruction is made for introduction of
circuits in sequence.
Operating instruction
1. A special plug-in unit symbol is added in connection drawing of wire harnesses, see figure 1 below.
2. In order to reduce the number of symbols of special plug-in unit, all plug-in units between wire harness
and load are illustrated by words.
3. See figure 2 for symbol of wire plug-in unit on boot, where the number above is wire number, and the
letters below represent color of wire.
In addition: double-color wire is represented by a slash (/) between letters representing the two colors, where
letters on the left of (/) indicate color of wire, and letters on the right of it indicate color of another fine wire on the
wire. For example: L/R means blue wire with red fine wire; Br/Gr means brown wire with gray fine wire.
4. Pin number of plug-in unit is subject to the direction in which wire and plug-in unit are inserted in boot.
Plug units are numbered from left to right, while plug jack units are numbered from right to left, see
figure 3.
See the table below for letters representing wire color
B –Black Br—Brown G----Green Gr---Gray L----Blue Lg—Light green
Or--Orange P---Pink R---Red V---Violet W---White Y---Yellow

Wire number

Plug jack end Plug end


Wire color

Figure 1 Figure 2

Boot view direction Boot view direction

Pin number direction at anode end of plug Pin number direction at cathode end of plug

Figure 3

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body electrical system — Wire harness BE-3

分两页布置 Wire harness

Relations between wire harnesses and plug-in unit connection number drawing

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BE-4 Vehicle body electrical system — Wire harness

Wire harness
middle wire connection serial number function diagram 1

Connected to engine Connected to engine


room wire harness A wire harness A

Connected to engine Connected to engine


room wire harness B wire harness B

Connected to engine Connected to engine


room wire harness C wire harness C

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body electrical system — Wire harness BE-5

middle wire connection serial number function diagram 2

Connected to instru- Connected to engine


ment wire harness A room wire harness A

Connected to instru- Connected to engine


ment wire harness B room wire harness B

Connected to instru- Connected to engine


ment wire harness C room wire harness C

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BE-6 Vehicle body electrical system — Wire harness

middle wire connection serial number function diagram 3

Connected to dome Connected to instru-


wire harness ment wire harness

Connected to engine Connected to instru-


room wire harness ment wire harness

Connected to transmis- Connected to instru-


sion wire harness ment wire harness

Connected to Connected to instrument


floor wire harness panel wire harness

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body electrical system — Wire harness BE-7

middle wire connection serial number function diagram 4

Connected to instrument Connected to right left door


wire harness assembly A wire harness assembly A

Connected to instrument Connected to right left door


wire harness assembly B wire harness assembly B

Connected to instrument Connected to right front door


wire harness assembly B wire harness assembly B

Connected to instrument Connected to right front door


wire harness assembly A wire harness assembly A

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BE-8 Vehicle body electrical system — Wire harness

middle wire connection serial number function diagram 5

Connected to Chassis wire Connected to floor wire


harness assembly harnessassembly

Connected to Connected to left rear


floor wire harness door wire harness assembly

Connected to Connected to right rear


floor wire harness door wire harness assembly

Connected to Air bag Connected to instrument


wire harness(Yellow) panel wire harness(Yellow)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body electrical system — Exploded view of vehicle circuit BE-9

Exploded view of vehicle circuit


Power generation and starting system

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BE-10 Vehicle body electrical system — Exploded view of vehicle circuit

Engine electronic control system

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body electrical system — Exploded view of vehicle circuit BE-11

Illumination and signal system

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BE-12 Vehicle body electrical system — Exploded view of vehicle circuit

Combined instrument system

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body electrical system — Exploded view of vehicle circuit BE-13

4WD electric controlled transmission and electric clutch system

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BE-14 Vehicle body electrical system — Exploded view of vehicle circuit

Entertainment and air conditioner system

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body electrical system — Exploded view of vehicle circuit BE-15

Cigarette lighter, power plug, wiper and power mirror system

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BE-16 Vehicle body electrical system — Exploded view of vehicle circuit

ABS system

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body electrical system — Exploded view of vehicle circuit BE-17

Air bag

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BE-18 Vehicle body electrical system — Exploded view of vehicle circuit

Central controller and riser system

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body electrical system — Central door lock BE-19

Central door lock


Definition of wire harness of central door lock controller

1. Headlight detection
It is connected to anode wire of high beam light which produces an output voltage of 12V during operation.
2. Right turn light
It is connected to anode wire of right turn light which produces an output voltage of 12V during operation.
3. Positive output of power window
It is connected to power window relay. When the key turns to ON gear, an output voltage of 12V is produced, and
after the key is pulled out, a 60-second 12V voltage time delay is delivered.
4. Roof output
It is connected to negative trigger of roof controller, which produces a 1-second negative signal output after the
system enters remote control door state. (reserved)
5. Unlock output of central door lock
It is connected to unlock wire of actuator of central door lock, and a voltage output of 12V is produced when
unlocking.
6. Lock output of central door lock
It is connected to unlock wire of actuator of central door lock, and a voltage output of 12V is produced when
locking.
7. Detection of key insert
It is connected to check line of lock head, and electric potential is lowered when key insert is detected.
8. Left turn light
It is connected to anode wire of left turn light which produces an output voltage of 12V during operation.
9. Reading lamp output
It is connected to negative trigger line of front reading lamp, which produces low electric potential during operation,
and at the moment reading lamp is on.
10. Detection of lock switch
Connected to internal lock switch of left front door. When the lock is unlocked its internal switch is switched on.
This wire has low electric potential.
11.Tachometer detection
It is connected to output line of tachometer detection line. Central door lock is locked automatically when traveling
speed reaches 15 km/h. The door shall be unlocked automatically after flame out of engine.
12.ON power source detection
It is connected to ON gear wire of ignition switch which produces a voltage output of 12V when the key is turned
to ON position.
13. Cathode of power source
This wire is earthed. (this wire too long shall produce interference source)
16. Anode of power source
It is connected to anode of battery and is covered by 20A insurance.
17. Air bag signal

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BE-20 Vehicle body electrical system — Central door lock

This wire is connected to unlock signal of air bag.


19. Manual lock signal
It is connected to lock control wire of central door lock of left front door, and is to be connected to cathode of
power source (earth) during operation.
20.Manual unlock signal
It is connected to unlock control wire of central door lock of left front door, and is to be connected to cathode of
power source (earth) during operation.
21.Left front door switch
This wire is connected to control wire of left front door switch, and is connected to cathode of power source
(earth) during operation.
22.Right front door switch
This wire is connected to control wire of right front door switch, and is connected to cathode of power source
(earth) during operation.
Functional description of central door lock controller
1. Locking
After all the doors are closed, press “LOCK” key of controller once. Turn light shall flash and central door lock
shall be locked.
2. Unlocking
Press “UNLOCK” key of controller once in locking condition. Turn light shall flash twice and central door lock
shall be unlocked.
3. Panic function
Press “UNLOCK” key of controller once in locking condition. Turn light shall flash 10 times in a very short time.
Press “UNLOCK” key of controller to quit panic function.
4. Automatic protection function
In locking condition, press “UNLOCK” key of controller to unlock the door. If the door has not been opened, it
shall be locked automatically after 30 seconds.
5. Automatic locking during running
When traveling speed increases from 0 km/h to 15 km/h, central door lock shall lock itself. After IG gear of
ignition switch is disconnected, the door shall be unlocked automatically.
When JP1 is connected to H, automatic locking function is open; when JP1 is connected to L, automatic locking
function is closed.
6. Pause of remote control function
When the key is inserted into ignition lock, remote controller shall not work, but the host can work normally.
7. Manual unlocking and locking of door lock
Unlocking or locking may be controlled manually.
8. Clear and registration of remote controller
Open the door, insert the key into ignition lock and switch OFF gear to ON gear for 5 times in a short time, finally
maintain ON gear. Here one flash of the light means learning function is started. By pressing any of the keys of
remote controller, registration of remote controller is completed which is indicated by two flashes of the light. By
repeated operation a maximum of 4 remote controllers may be registered: if no key of remote controller is pressed
in 10 seconds, system shall quit learning function automatically. Registration of new remote controllers shall clear
the earliest registrations in condition that there are already 4 remote controllers registered.
9. Reading lamp time delay function
(a) By opening the door then closing it, the light shall be on for 10 seconds. If the key is inserted into ignition
switch within the 10 seconds, reading lamp shall go out immediately.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body electrical system — Central door lock BE-21

(b) By opening the door then closing it, the light shall be on for 10 seconds. If the door is locked within the 10
seconds, reading lamp shall go out immediately.
(c) By pulling out the key from ignition switch, the light shall be on for 1 minute. If the key is inserted into
ignition switch again, reading lamp shall go out immediately.
(d) By pulling out the key from ignition switch, the light shall be on for 1 minute. If the door is locked, reading
lamp shall go out immediately.
10. Buzz function
(a) The key is inserted (low) and is not at ON gear (high). Opening of any door shall cause intermittent buzz of
the buzzer;
(b) When the key is not inserted, high beam light is on and one of the doors is open, the buzzer shall give a long
buzz.
11. Mains supply of riser time delay
After the key is pulled out form ignition lock, central controller shall provide control switch of riser with one-
minute power source to close windows (windows are to be raised by pressing riser switch). If windows have not
been raised in one minute, by inserting the key into ignition switch then pulling it out again another one-minute
power source is obtained.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BE-22 Vehicle body electrical system — Audio system

Audio system
Precautions:
1. When radio player is in CD mode, in order to avoid abnormal damage of instrument due to too high
temperature, it shall start thermal protection function automatically and turn down the sound volume.
2. If CD player can not work normally, press(▲)key for more than 5 seconds to reset it to normal
condition.
Troubleshooting
System Trouble Remedy
Cassette Display is blank when switch is 1 Check fuse at the back of the player is not loose
system turned on 2 Check fuse is not open circuit
3 If new fuse is blown again, send the player to special
technicians for repair
No broadcasting station can be
Check antenna or antenna socket at the back of the player is
received either through FM or
not loose
through AM
Left or right sound track out of 1 Press balancing potentiometer, spin it from left to right,
function and turn it to central position
2 Check each contact pin of socket at the back of the player
is in good contact
Impure acoustics of broadcasting Manually search broadcasting stations to obtain pure
stations acquired by auto-search acoustics
CD player CD player indicates “ERROR” CD disc may be placed in wrong direction – it shall be
system placed in CD player with its face down
Engine produces “toot” sound as Check power line is connected
that of motor during operation Check earth wire of the player is connected to that of the
vehicle
No sound output and blank display Check power line is connected
Check all the fuses
Check all the power lines
The player is overheated under Check earth wire of the player is connected to that of the
normal sound volume vehicle
Antenna no signal Check connecting wire of antenna
Sound output is weak, bass is The reason is that loudspeakers are out of phase. Check
abnormal and left and right side is audio connecting line.
unbalanced
Front and rear loudspeaker control
Check the wire connected to loudspeaker
out of function

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body electrical system — Audio system BE-23

Composition and function of CC1031PS40/60 audio system


Audio system of this model is equipped with either CD player or cassette player.
Standard equipment: cassette player + 2 front door loudspeakers + 2 back door loudspeakers +
telescopic antenna.
Advanced equipment: single disc CD player + 2 front door loudspeakers + 2 back door loudspeakers
+ 2 front door high pitch loudspeaker + telescopic antenna.
1. Cassette player
This series of models feature phase locking loop type electronic tuning, FM/AM stereo digital display radio player,
and such functions as tone control circuit and automatic reverse, etc. Preselecting stations: 30 (18FM + 12AM).
2. CD player
This model features an audio system with PLL electronic tuning radio and CD player, and can receive AM, FM and
FM stereo broadcasting as well as play CD disc. Preselecting stations: 30 (18FM + 12AM). It also features EAS
electronic anti-knock function.

Operating principle of CC1031PS40/60 audio system


1. Cassette player
(a) Host is connected to loudspeaker: PA of host is 4-track BTL output, maximum output power is 4 x 15W;
each loudspeaker shall have a special line, and its phase and position shall be connected accurately; please
switch off the power source before connecting loudspeaker to avoid short circuit of wire.
(b) Host is connected to antenna: insert coaxial cable plug of antenna into socket of host antenna; the joint of
antenna socket shall be firm and reliable.
Attention: unreliable joint of antenna shall lead to failure of radio function.
2. CD player
(a) Host is connected to loudspeaker: PA of host is 4-track BTL output, maximum output power is 4 x 30W;
each loudspeaker shall have a special line, and its phase and position shall be connected accurately; please
switch off the power source before connecting loudspeaker to avoid short circuit of wire.
(b) Host is connected to antenna: insert coaxial cable plug of antenna into socket of host antenna; the joint of
antenna socket shall be firm and reliable.
Attention: unreliable joint of antenna shall lead to failure of radio function.
3. Definition of system foot

Definition of foot
No.
Ⅰ Ⅱ
1 R.R(+)
2 R.R(-)
3 R.F(+)
4 ACC+ R.F(-)
5 ANTENNA L.F(+)
6 ILLUMINATION L.F(-)
7 BATTERY L.R(+)
8 GNT L.R(-)

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


BE-24 Vehicle body electrical system — Audio system

技术参数
System Item Technical parameter
Cassette playerMains voltage 12V
Current consumption 2.5A
Rated power 4×6W(load 4Ω)
Tape speed error <±1.5%
S/N 50dB
Frequency response (100~8000)Hz
Frequency range FM:(87.5~108.0)MHz AM:(531~1629)KHz
S/N FM:55dB AM:50dB
CD player Power source 14.4V minus earth DC power source
Input current Maximum 10A
Output power Maximum 4×30W
Bass control ±10dB at 100Hz
High pitch control ±10dB at 10KHz
S/N >70dB
Degree of separation for>55dB
sound track
Range of frequency response
(20~20)KHz
Degree of distortion <0.2%
Frequency range FM:(87.5~108)MHz AM:(531~1629)KHz
S/N FM:60dB AM:40dB

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 Àwww.fineprint.com.cn


AC-1

Air conditioning system


page

Troubleshooting .......................................................... AC-2


Air conditioning system ............................................... AC-5
Daily maintenance of air conditioning system .............. AC-6
Vacuum pumping and filling of refrigerant .................... AC-7
Maintenance and replacement of pipeline .................... AC-8
Amount of refrigeration oil to be filled and method for filling
.............................................. AC-9

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


AC-2 Air conditioning system—Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Location Trouble Causes
Air Compressor does Fuse blown, compressor relay damaged
conditioning not suck Contact of pressure switch disconnected, short circuit or open circuit
system out Electromagnetic clutch coil of compressor open circuit
of function Burn-out of switch
Burn-out of main relay
Clutch skidding
Fracture or loose of compressor belt
Compressor error
Insufficient secondary refrigerant, system pressure below 0.196MP
System pressure over 3.14MP
Water temperature of engine too high
Clutch voltage below 7V
Compressor Normally open contact of compressor relay sticky; no secondary refrigerant
sucks in system due to serious leakage
Blower sending no wind
Blower sending Fuse blown
no wind Motor and brush of blower damaged
Blower switch damaged
Wiring connector disconnected or circuit open
Speed adjustment module damaged
Blower sending no wind at high speed; high speed relay damaged
Intermittent Compressor in Refrigerating system frozen-up
refrigeration normal condition Failure of thermistor or temperature sensing package
of Poor contact of A/C switch
refrigerating Condensing fan damaged
system Compressor in Clutch skidding
abnormal Clutch coil loose
condition Poor earth of clutch coil
Insufficient Small air outlet Blower fan in normal condition: blast pipe damaged
refrigeration Air cooler abnormal:
(1) Blower switch abnormal
(2) Low pressure of power source
(3) Speed adjustment module damaged
Appropriate air Compressor in normal condition
outlet (1) Low pressure at both high and low tension side
(a) Expansion valve clogged
(b) Opening of expansion valve too small
(2) High pressure at both high and low tension side
(a) Failure of high pressure pipeline; flow encumbered
(b) Thermistor ineffective
(c) Opening of expansion valve too large
(d) Excessive refrigeration oil
(e) Excessive refrigerant
(f) Poor heat radiation of condenser

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Air conditioning system—Troubleshooting AC-3

Troubleshooting (continued)
Location Trouble Causes
Insufficient Appropria Compressor in normal condition
refrigeration te air (3) Pressure at high tension side too low
outlet (a) Damage of low pressure pipeline
(b) Low pressure pipeline clogged
(4) Pressure at low tension side too low
(a) Frosting of evaporator
(b) Expansion valve clogged
(c) Low pressure pipeline clogged
(d) Speed adjustment thermistor ineffective
(5) Low tension side sometimes normal, sometimes negative pressure; water in
refrigerating system and freeze-up
(6) Low tension side negative pressure, high tension side pressure too low,
refrigerating system clogged
(7) Low tension side pressure too low, high tension side pressure too high
(a) Interior of fluid dryer clogged
(b) High pressure pipeline clogged
(8) Low tension side pressure too high, high tension side pressure too low
(a) Leakage of compressor
(b) Compressor valve damaged
(9) Poor radiation of condenser due to small air output of condensing fan
Compressor in abnormal condition
(1) Compressor internal fault
(2) Compressor belt too loose and skid
(3) Electromagnetic clutch fault
(a) Low mains voltage
(b) Interference of stator and rotor
(c) Stable idle amplifier fault
(d) Open circuit, connecting part disconnected
(e) Switch and relay in poor working condition
(f) Open circuit, short circuit
(g) Poor earth
Other reasons
Poor sealing of vehicle body
Noise of Noise too Belt too loose or excessively worn
refrigerating loud Set screws of compressor mounting bracket loose
system Damage of compressor mounting bracket
Internal parts of compressor damaged
Lack or absence of refrigeration oil
Clutch skid noise
Clutch bearing lacking oil or damaged
Motor bearing of blower damaged
Fracture or loose of blower bracket
Fracture or loose of blower blade
Friction of blower blade and other parts

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


AC-4 Air conditioning system—Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting (continued)
Location Trouble Causes
Heating No heating or Blower of air conditioner out of function
system insufficient heating Blower relay damaged
Hot water pipe clogged
Cooling water pipe clogged
Cool and warm air door cable damaged
Insufficient coolant
Blower out of Fuse blown or poor contact of switch
function Burn-out of blower motor
High speed relay of blower open circuit
Speed adjustment resistor damaged
Circuit open
Water leakage Aging of heater pipe and loose of joint
Overheat Speed adjustment resistor of fan damaged
Cool and warm air door cable damaged
Insufficient hot air Mode cable damaged
for defrosting Inappropriate position of door
Air outlet clogged
Insufficient heating
Inappropriate installation of tunnel
Circuit open

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Air conditioning system — Air conditioning system AC-5

Air conditioning system


Component Chart

Evaporator

Low pressure hose

Compressor

High pressure hose


Fluid reservoir

Condenser

Basic component of CC1031PS40/60 air


conditioning system
The air conditioning system of CC1031PS40/60C model is a
manually controlled system featuring an integration of
ventilation, heating and refrigeration. Cool and warm air is
separated with silent air outlet. Air cleaning equipment is also
equipped.
Basic components: heater assembly, compressor assembly,
blower assembly, condenser assembly, evaporator assembly,
pipeline, air conditioner control panel assembly, defrosting
system, heating system and ventilation system, etc.

Operating principle of CC1031PS40/60 air


conditioning system
1. This system is manually controlled air conditioning
system. Internal and external circulation, air blowing
mode and temperature regulation are all controlled by
cables of control panel.
Attention: when starting compressor, air regulating knob
must be open, otherwise compressor can not be started.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


AC-6 Air conditioning system — Daily maintenance of air conditioning syste

2. Definition of each terminal of air conditioning system.

Blower air outlet switch Control panel input

1 1 Gear position 1 Defrosting signal input 7 Null


2 Common port 2 Backlight + 8 Request signal output terminal
3 Signal terminal 3 Backlight - 9 Defrosting relay output terminal
4 4 Gear position 4 Request signal output term inal 10 Com mon earth terminal
5 3 Gear position 5 Null 11 Earth terminal
6 2 Gear position 6 Null 12 Input terminal

Three state
pressure switch Speed adjustment resistor Blower motor
Evaporator temperature sensor

1 AC 2 Earth First and second terminals connected to medium voltage


3 Compressor relay Third and fourth terminals connected to high voltage

3. Check drive belt. Belt between compressor and


Daily maintenance of air con-
engine shall be strained.
ditioning system 4. Check that air conditioning system does not
In order to ensure normal operation of air produce abnormal noise and smell.
conditioning system, maintenance shall be 5. Check that temperature difference at air inlet and
performed regularly. Daily maintenance of outlet of compressor is normal.
air conditioning system is as follows: 6. Check appearance of hose of refrigeration system
1. Check and clean condenser of air is normal and connection at each joint is tight.
conditioning system to the effect that 7. Check refrigeration system pipeline does not
radiating fin is clean and no stemming contact other parts and there is no trace of oil
remains among radiating fins. After leakage at each joint.
running in rain or on muddy road, check 8. Check circuit connection of refrigeration system is
there is no mud, sand or stones in rel iab l e and the re is no op en circ uit and
condenser fan, otherwise clean the fan disconnection.
in time. 9. Check binding bolts of compressor are tight and
2. Check the amount of working medium not fractured.
of ref rigeration system; w hen air
conditioning unit is in normal condition,
observe the fluid sight glass which in
normal condition does not contain
bubbles.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Air conditioning system—Vacuum pumping and filling of refrigerant AC-7

Low pressure
High pressure Vacuum pumping and filling of refrigerant
Manifold gauge
Low pressure Blue Connect air conditioner (Compressor) pipeline and multi-
Red
pipe purpose joint of vacuum pump with pressure manifold gauge,
Snap fitting High pressure pipe and then start vacuum pumping. Before vacuum pumping,
open high and low pressure valve of pressure manifold gauge
Snap fitting as well as end valve of vacuum pump (if any), then press
Vacuum pump
“ON” button to start vacuum pump and keep vacuum pump
in operation for more than 20 minutes. When pressure manifold
gauge indicates –760mmHg or even lower, close high and
Manifold gauge low valve as well as end valve of vacuum pump (if it is open),
Low pressure gauge High pressure gauge and switch off vacuum pump.

Air tightness inspection


Continue to check readings of pressure manifold gauge after
Yellow vacuum pump is switched off.
If pressure reading remains constant for 20 minutes after stop
Blue Yellow Red
of vacuum pump, it demonstrates that refrigeration system is
not leaking and it is possible to carry out next work. Change
of reading indicates there is still leakage in system. Check and
repair leaking part, and then start vacuum pumping again.

Filling of refrigerant
1. After air tightness of system is confirmed, connect
refrigerant reservoir (or gas cylinder) to one end of yellow
inflated hose. The other end of yellow inflated hose is
connected to filler port in the middle of pressure manifold
gauge. Ensure nuts on refrigerant reservoir and inflated
hose are tightened, and then open valve of refrigerant
Air purge close
reservoir. At the moment high and low pressure valve is
Red
closed. Press on valve core on side port with pin
Yellow
screwdriver or similar tools for 1 to 2 seconds to
Blue
discharge air in inflated hose and manifold gauge.
Refrigerant reservoir
2. Open high pressure valve of pressure manifold gauge,
and fill system with refrigerant through high pressure
Low pressure High pressure
pipeline. Here note readings of high and low pressure
close gauge and confirm that both two readings have
Open
Blue increased. If pressure does not increase when
Red
refrigerant is filled, it can be inferred that joint of pipeline
Yellow is loose or seal is damaged. After reasons are found
out and repair is done, refill refrigerant. When pressure
stops increasing, close high pressure valve of pressure
Refrigerant reservoir manifold gauge then start the engine.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


AC-8 Air conditioning system — Maintenance and replacement of pipeline

Low pressure High pressure Perform open and close operation accord-
Open
Blue Open ing to the following procedures
Red Turn up speed adjustment switch of blower to its limit,
turn temperature control switch to coldest position,
Yellow
press A/C switch, and select internal circulation mode for
internal/external circulation,
Refrigerant reservoir and keep doors and windows open during the process.
Regulate engine speed to idle as specified.
Erect refrigerant reservoir or gas cylinder (to let refrigerant
flow into refrigeration system in gaseous form), and open
low pressure valve of pressure manifold gauge.
Do not open high pressure valve when compressor is running.
Before inspection of refrigeration level, refrigerant volume to
be filled according to stipulations of air conditioning system
shall be determined.
When filling refrigerant, carefully observe high tension side of
pressure manifold gauge, for flow status of refrigerant (clear,
foaming, turbid) can be observed from inspection window,
so that appropriate time to stop filling can be determined (by
Pressure at
high tension closing low pressure valve).
side Before determining volume of refrigerant to be filled, please
(M P a ) Appropriate
pressure
set up according to the following operating conditions.
Temperature of engine water tank: stable
(Appropriate fill) (Surfeit fill) Engine speed: normal idle
A/C switch: ON
Refrigerant volume (g)
Speed adjustment switch of blower: maximum gear
Temperature controller: air return temperature inside vehicle
body is at the middle position.
Control of first of the air: internal circulation
Door: completely open
Window: completely open

Maintenance and replacement of pipe-


Switch off
line
1. Before installation of parts, cathode of batteries must
be disconnected.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Air conditioning system—Amount of refrigeration oil to be filled and method for filling AC-9

2. When air inlets of refrigeration system, water tank of


engine and air conditioner are open, be sure to cover
Protective cap
each opening with a cap to prevent dust, external
Hard hat impurity and water from entering.
3. Mount protective cap on end of each pipe until pipe is
connected to refrigeration system.

Protective cap must be installed

4. When connecting pipes, add some compressor oil to O


ring and tighten nuts with two wrenches. Note not to spray
compressor oil onto painted or plastic parts to avoid
defilement. If it is already sprayed onto these parts, clean
them immediately.
Compressor oil Tightening with 5. W hen connecting pipes, tighten screws or nuts
2 wrenches at according to torques specified in the following table.
one time
Diameter (mm) Tightening torque (N·m)
¢8 12-15
¢16 30-35

Amount of refrigeration oil to be filled and method for filling


1. CC1031PS40/60 air conditioning system is equipped with JSS-D14 compressor manufactured by
Chongqin Construction. The stipulated refrigeration oil type is RS-20, and use of other types of
refrigeration oil shall damage parts of the compressor. Refrigeration oil must be replenished when
some of parts need replacing during repair: evaporator, condenser: 30mll; dryer: 20ml; pipeline: 10ml.
2. There are two ways of filling refrigeration oil: direct filling and vacuum suction
(a) Direct filling: ① Remove oil filler plug and fill up refrigeration oil of the stipulated RS-20 type; ② Observe
through hole of oil filler plug and rotate front panel of clutch to locate connecting rod of piston in the very
middle position of hole of oil filler plug; ③ Insert dip stick to the right of connecting rod of piston until end
of dip stick contacts cover of compressor; ④ Take out dip stick and check scale (marking) of refrigeration
oil which shall be between 4 and 6; ⑤ Tighten oil plug to a torque of (14.7 ± 4.9)N.m
(b) Vacuum suction: first vacuumize refrigeration system to 0.2X105 Pa, then start to fill RS-20 refrigeration oil
according to the following procedures: ① Close high pressure manual valve and auxiliary valve; ②
Dismount the hose on high tension side from manifold pressure gauge and insert it into oil cup; ③ Open
auxiliary valve and let refrigeration oil sucked into refrigeration system from oil cup; ④ When refrigeration
oil in oil cup is nearly pumped out, close auxiliary valve immediately to avoid air being sucked into system;
⑤ Screw hose connection on high tension side on manifold pressure gauge, and start vacuum pump to open
high pressure manual valve, then open auxiliary valve to vacuumize the system to 0.2X105Pa and proceed
for another 15 minutes so as to discharge air in the system.
Attention:
1. When replacing old compressor with new one, some oil must be discharged to match the amount in the
old one, so that impair of refrigeration effect due to excessive oil can be avoided.
2. If old or repaired compressors are used, oil volume of these compressors shall be equal to that of new
compressors.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-1

Vehicle body
Page

General ....................................................................... BO-2


Engine hood ................................................................ BO-3
Front door ................................................................... BO-4
Back door ................................................................... BO-10
Vehicle body chafing strip ............................................ BO-15
Wheel trim .................................................................. BO-17
Front windshield glass ................................................ BO-18
Rear windshield glass ................................................. BO-20
Trunk rear panel assembly .......................................... BO-22
Instrument panel ......................................................... BO-23
Seat belt ..................................................................... BO-26
Seat ............................................................................ BO-28
Body dimension .......................................................... BO-29

BO

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-2 Vehicle body — General

General
In the case of damage of vehicle body and parts, first take
measures to protect vehicles from damage before repair.
For example:
1. During disassembly and installation, protective tape shall
be affixed to relevant parts of the body.

2. Before prying open vehicle body parts with screwdriver


or scraper, their head or blade shall be wrapped with
tape to prevent paint coat or body from damage.

Protect the tape

If rust inhibitor is damaged when repairing other parts, it


Peeling off shall be repaired.
For example:
1. If sealant, paint coat or primer coat of vehicle body is
damaged due to falling off and crack, etc., repair shall
be made using relevant rust inhibitor.
Crack

2. If hinge or external board is loosened or removed, rust


inhibition shall be coated after repair.

Rust depressant

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body — Engine hood B0-3

Engine hood
Adjustment of engine hood
1. Adjustment of engine hood in front/rear and left/right
directions
Unscrew bolts of engine hood hinge and adjust engine hood.

2. Adjustment of leading edge of engine hood in vertical


direction
Rotate buffer slab to adjust engine hood.

3. Adjustment of lock catch of engine hood


Unscrew bolts and adjust lock catch.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-4 Vehicle body—Front door

Front door
Part drawing

Right front door glass mud chute


Right front door glass assembly

Right front door external


water bar
Right outside rearview mirror assembly

Right front door glass guide rail assembly

Right front door glass rear guide rail

Right side door lock


Front door internal buckle assembly
hinge

Right front side door external handle assembly


Front door check

Right front side door lock assembly

Lock hook assembly


Right front door electric
window regulator assembly

Right front door joint strip

Internal set square of outside rearview mirror

Right front door internal water bar

Right front inner door


trim assembly (electric)
Right front inner door trim
assembly (manual)

Outer trim frame of right Switch panel of right front door


side internal buckle window regulator
Regulator handle

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body—Front door B0-5

Adjustment of front door


1. Adjustment of door in front/rear and vertical directions
Adjust the door after holding down bolts of door side
hinge are unscrewed.

2. Adjustment of door in left/right and vertical directions


djust the door after holding down bolts of door side hinge
are unscrewed.

3. Adjustment of door lock catch


(a) Check adjustment of installation of door and match of
door lock is completed.
(b) Gently unscrew holddown bolts of lock catch and beat
the lock catch with a rawhide hammer to adjust its
position.
(c) Then tighten set screws of lock catch.

Disassembly of front door


1. Remove regulator handle
Open spring clip with a slotted screwdriver and remove
regulator handle and diaphragm.

2. Dismount of inside door handle


(a) Remove screws and slide the handle forward.
(b) Separate the handle from control lever and remove the
handle.
3. Remove internal decorative set square
Pry loose clip joint with a screwdriver and remove internal
decorative set square.
Attention: before screwdriver is used, its head must be
wrapped with tape.
4. Dismount of rearview mirror
Remove 3 nuts and outside rearview mirror.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-6 Vehicle body—Front door

Inner manual door trim 5. Dismount of inner door trim


Inner manual door trim:
(a) Remove internal buckle bolts and internal buckle.
(b) Remove bolts of door arm rest.
(c) Insert screwdriver between fixed clip and inner door trim
and pry it loose.
Attention: before screwdriver is used, its head must be
○ 8 clips wrapped with tape.
Inner plate of electric door (d) Remove inner door trim.
Inner electric door trim:
(a) Remove internal buckle bolts and internal buckle.
(b) Remove bolts of motor switch panel.
(c) Remove motor switch and panel.
(d) Insert screwdriver between fixed clip and inner door trim
and pry it loose.
Attention: before screwdriver is used, its head must be
○ 8 clips wrapped with tape.
(e) Remove inner door trim.

6. Dismount of front door external water bar


Lower the glass to appropriate position, grip external water
bar by hand and pull it up with force to remove it.

7. Dismount of front door glass assembly


(a) Adjust front door glass to align fixed bolts of glass bracket
with installation holes of inner panel, and remove 2 fixed
bolts of glass bracket.
(b) Pull glass up and remove it by tilting it.
8. Dismount of door glass mud chute

9. Dismount of rear assembly of front door glass guide rail


Dismount guide rail by removing its fixed bolts.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body—Front door B0-7

10. Dismount of window regulator


(a) Remove 4 fixed bolt of regulator and 2 fixing nuts of
regulator.
(b) Remove regulator through auxiliary hole.

11. Dismount of locking button inside vehicles


Relieve control lever and dismount locking button inside
vehicles.
12. Dismount of door lock and outside door handle with lock
cylinder
(a) Separate control lever from outside door handle with lock
cylinder.
(b) Remove 3 screws and door lock.
(c) Remove 2 bolts and outside door handle with lock cylinder.
(d) Remove spring clip and lock cylinder.
Replacement of front door glass
1. Adjust front door glass to align fixed bolts of glass bracket
with installation holes of inner panel.

2. Remove fixed bolts of glass bracket and take out the


glass.

Assembly of front door


1. Before installation of parts, coat them with MP grease.
(a) Coat sliding plane and gear of glass regulator with MP
grease.
Attention: do not coat spring of window regulator with
MP grease.
(b) Coat sliding plane of door lock with MP grease.

2. Installation of outside door handle and door lock


(a) Mount lock cylinder on outside door handle with spring
clip.
(b) Install outside door handle and lock cylinder with 2 bolts.
(c) Install door lock with 3 bolts.
(d) Connect control lever to outside door handle.
3. Installation of locking button inside the door
Install locking button inside vehicles and connect control lever.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-8 Vehicle body—Front door

4. Installation of rear assembly of front door glass guide


rail

5. Installation of window regulator


(a) Install regulator through auxiliary hole.
(b) Install 4 fixed bolt of regulator and 2 fixing nuts of
regulator.
6. Installation of front door glass mud chute

7. Installation of front door glass assembly


Adjust bracket arm of window regulator to align fixed holes
of glass bracket with installation holes of inner panel. Install
glass in glass mud chute, and mount glass bracket on bracket
arm of the regulator with 2 bolts.
8. Installation of front door external water bar
Lower glass to appropriate position and mount external water
bar on rabbet of outer panel of the door.
9. Installation of outside rearview mirror

Inner manual door trim 10. Installation of inner door trim


Inner manual door trim
(a) First mount handle on control lever, then take it out from
handle hole inside the door.
(b) Use fixing clip to install inner plate of door to
corresponding hole by gently beat.
(c) Fix door arm rest with 2 bolts.
○ 8 clips (d) Install internal buckle with 1 bolt.
Inner plate of electric door
Inner plate of electric door
(a) First mount handle on control lever, then take it out from
handle hole inside the door.
(b) Use fixing clip to install inner door trim to corresponding
hole by gently beat.
(c) Install motor switch and panel with 2 bolts.
(d) Install internal buckle with 1 bolt.

○ 8 clips

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body—Front door B0-9

11. Installation of inside door handle


(a) Push door handle into panel board of the door and slide it
backward.
(b) Tighten screws.
12.Installation of regulator handle
In case doors and windows are all closed, install panel board
and regulator handle with spring clip according to the drawing.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-10 Vehicle body — Back door

Back door
Part drawing

Right back door glass mud chute Right back door external water bar Right back door glass assembly

Right front door glass front guide rail

Rear check
Right side door lock
internal buckle assembly Right front door glass rear guide rail
Right back side door
Back door hinge outside handle assembly

Lock hook assembly

Right back door lock assembly

Right back door electric window regulator assembly

Right back door joint strip

Right back door internal water bar

Switch panel of right


back door regulator

Right front inner door trim assembly (electric)

Right front inner door trim assembly (manual)


Outer trim frame of right side internal buckle
Regulator handle

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body — Back door B0-11

Adjustment of back door


The same as adjustment of front door

Disassembly of back door


1. Dismount of regulator handle
Open spring clip with a slotted screwdriver and remove
regulator handle and diaphragm.

2. Dismount of inside door handle


(a) Remove screws and slide the handle forward.
(b) Separate the handle from control lever and remove the
handle.

Inner manual door trim 3. Dismount of inner door trim


Inner manual door trim
(a) Remove internal buckle bolts and internal buckle.
(b) Remove bolts of door arm rest.
(c) Insert screwdriver between fixed clip and inner door trim
and pry it loose.
Attention: before screwdriver is used, its head must be
wrapped with tape.
○ 7 clips (d) Remove inner door trim.
Inner plate of electric door Inner plate of electric door
(a) Remove internal buckle bolts and internal buckle.
(b) Remove bolts of motor switch panel.
(c) Remove motor switch and panel.
(d) Insert screwdriver between fixed clip and inner door trim
and pry it loose.
Attention: before screwdriver is used, its head must be
wrapped with tape.
○ 7 clips
(e) Remove inner door trim.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-12 Vehicle body — Back door

4. Dismount of back door external water bar


Lower the glass to appropriate position, grip external water
bar by hand and pull it up with force to remove it.

5. Dismount of back door glass assembly


(a) Adjust glass to align fixed bolts of glass bracket with
installation holes of inner panel, and remove 2 fixed bolts
of glass bracket.
(b) Pull glass up and remove it by tilting it.
6. Dismount of back door glass mud chute

7. Dismount of back door glass guide rail assembly

8. Dismount of window regulator


(a) Remove 5 fixed bolts of regulator bracket.
(b) Remove regulator through auxiliary hole.

9. Dismount of locking button inside vehicles


Relieve control lever and dismount locking button inside
vehicles.

10. Dismount of door lock and outside door handle with lock
cylinder
(a) Remove 3 screws and door lock.
(b) Remove 2 bolts and outside door handle with lock cylinder.
(c) Remove spring clip and lock cylinder.

Replacement of back door glass assembly


1. Adjust front door glass to align fixed bolts of glass bracket
with installation holes of inner panel.

2. Remove fixed bolts of glass bracket and take out the


glass.
278mm

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body — Back door B0-13

Assembly of back door


1. Before installation of parts, coat them with MP grease.
(a) Coat sliding plane and gear of glass regulator with MP
grease.
Attention: do not coat spring of window regulator with
MP grease.
(b) Coat sliding plane of door lock with MP grease.

2. Installation of outside door handle and door lock


(a) Mount lock cylinder on outside door handle with spring
clip.
(b) Install outside door handle and lock cylinder with 2 bolts.
(c) Install door lock with 3 bolts.
(d) Connect control lever to outside door handle.

3. Installation of locking button inside the door


Install locking button inside vehicles and connect control lever.
4. Installation of window regulator
(a) Install regulator through auxiliary hole
(b) Install 3 fixed bolts of regulator.
(c) Install 4 fixed bolts of regulator bracket.

5. Installation of back door glass guide rail assembly


Install guide rail and bolts.

6. Installation of back door glass mud chute

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-14 Vehicle body — Back door

7. Installation of back door glass assembly


Install glass into door chamber, and mount glass on window
regulator with 2 bolts.

8. Installation of back door external water bar


Lower glass to appropriate position and mount external water
bar on rabbet of outer panel of the door.

9. Installation of inner door trim

10. Installation of inside door handle


(a) Push door handle into panel board of the door and slide it
backward.
(b) Tighten screws.
11. Installation of regulator handle

In case doors and windows are all closed, install panel board
and regulator handle with spring clip according to the drawing.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body — Vehicle body chafing strip B0-15

Vehicle body chafing strip

Precautions for storage of vehicle body chafing strip:


1. It shall be stored at a cool place to avoid direct sunshine, high temperature and dust.
2. As vehicle body chafing strip is PP+EPDM-T30 product, do not let it contact paint thinner, other solvents
or boiling water.
3. The time limit for storage of vehicle body chafing strip is about 9 months.
Part drawing

Front side door chafing strip Back side door chafing strip Trunk chafing strip

AB:6.5mm
C D :9 m m
EF: 87mm
Note: Permissible clearance error between AB and CD 1mm
Permissible clearance error between EF

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-16 Vehicle body — Vehicle body chafing strip

Dismount of vehicle body chafing strip


1. Remove the end of chafing strip
Pry loose a 30mm-long part of the end of chafing strip with a
scraper.
Attention: before scraper is used, its head must be
wrapped with tape.

2. Dismount chafing strip and remove binders


(a) Cut off binders with a cutting knife and pull down chafing
strip.
(b) Scrape off binders from vehicle body with a cutting knife
or emery paper.
Remark: do not reuse removed chafing strip.

Installation of vehicle body chafing strip


1. Clean the plate-work fitting surface of chafing strip
Wipe off dirt with cleaning tools.
2. Pull out parting paper from 3M tape of chafing strip
Remark: when peeling off parting paper, note not to let dirt
and dust enter non-exposed parts.

3. Install chafing strip along stamping line of vehicle body


Affix chafing strip along stamping line of vehicle body as
indicated in the drawing.
Remark: lower edge line of chafing strip is in accordance with
stamping line.

Attention:
● Press on chafing strip with thumb and apply a
certain pressure to ensure it is firmly installed.
● After installation, do not clean the vehicle within 24
hours.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body — Wheel trim B0-17

Wheel trim
Installation site of parts

Front part of front fender trim bar

Front fender trim bar

Rear fender trim bar

Replacement of front fender trim bar and front


part of front fender trim bar
1. Dismount of front part of front fender trim bar
Remove 3 nuts and take off front part of front fender trim
bar.
2. Dismount of front fender trim bar
Remove 6 screws and take off 5 clips.
3. Installation of front part of front fender trim bar
Mount front part of front fender trim bar on front bumper and
fix it with 3 nuts.
4. Installation of front fender trim bar
(a) First fix 5 clips to fender trim bar, then mount clip seat
on fender, finally install fender trim bar on fender.
(b) Install 6 screws.

Replacement of rear fender trim bar


1. Dismount of rear fender trim bar
Remove 5 screws and take off fender trim bar.
2. Installation of rear fender trim bar
(a) First fix 5 clips to rear fender trim bar, then mount clip
seat on outer panel of the trunk, finally install fender trim
bar on outer panel of the trunk.
(b) Install 5 screws.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-18 Vehicle body—Front windshield glass

Front windshield glass


Installation site of parts

Upper trim bar of front windshield

Right clip bar of front windshield

Front windshield glass assy.


Wiper

Left clip bar of front windshield

Cover sheet of wiper

Dismount of front windshield glass assem-


bly
1. Dismount the following parts
(a) Wiper arm
(b) Left and right clip bar of front windshield
(c) Front wiper cover sheet

2. Dismount front windshield glass assembly


Prick a small hole in sealant between glass and vehicle body
and insert a small gauge wire into it, then two people cooperate
to pull the wire to separate glass from vehicle body completely
by sawing off the sealant, finally pull glass outward and
dismount it.
Attention: operate carefully to avoid damage of glass
and vehicle body.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body—Front windshield glass B0-19

Installation of front windshield glass assem-


bly
1. Clean vehicle body and glass
Remove the glass cement on surface of vehicle body and glass,
then clean contact surface between vehicle body and glass
with cleaning tools.
2. Mount upper trim bar of front windshield on glass
3. Install front windshield glass assembly
(a) Place two suction cups on surface of front windshield
glass, and put glass upside down on work bench.
(b) Coat cleaning activators along inner edge (glass black
edge) of front windshield glass and dry it (usually 10 to
15 minutes), then paint primer coat on cleaning activators
and dry it (usually 15 to 20 minutes), finally smear glass
cement along circumference of glass evenly.
(c) Wipe windshield rabbet of vehicle body with cotton yarn,
and clean it completely with cleaning agent and dry it
(usually 10 to 15 minutes), then paint the primer coat
and dry it (usually 15 to 20 minutes), finally affix front
windshield glass on the rabbet.
(d) Then smear glass cement along circumference of glass
evenly.
Attention: when smearing glass cement, no paraclase
shall exist at butt joint of glass cement.
(e) At last affix front windshield glass on the rabbet, and
adjust it by tapping on surroundings of glass cement by
hand to make it firm.
(f) Bind upper edge of front windshield glass and vehicle
body together with scotch tape in order to avoid loose of
glass.
Attention:
● Dip cloth in cleaning agent and use it to wipe off
redundant glass cement on vehicle body.
● Usually after 4 hours of placement in summer and
8 hours in winter shall the vehicle be put into
running.

4. Install the following parts


(a) Cover sheet of wiper.
(b) Wiper arm.
(c) (Left and right) clip bar of front windshield.

5. Check for leakage and repair


(a) Perform leakage test.
(b) Seal leaking parts with glass cement.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-20 Vehicle body — Rear windshield glass

Rear windshield glass


Installation site of parts

Rear windshield glass

Dismount of rear windshield glass assembly


Prick a small hole in sealant between glass and vehicle body
with a tool and insert a steel wire into it, then two people
cooperate to pull the wire to separate glass from vehicle body
completely by sawing off the sealant, finally pull glass outward
and dismount it.

Installation of rear windshield glass assem-


bly
1. Clean vehicle body and glass
Remove the glass cement on surface of vehicle body and glass,
then clean contact surface between vehicle body and glass
with cleaning tools.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body — Rear windshield glass B0-21

2. Install rear windshield glass assembly


(a) Place two suction cups on surface of rear windshield
glass, and put glass upside down on work bench.
(b) Coat cleaning activators along inner edge (glass black
edge) of rear windshield glass and dry it (usually 5 to 15
minutes), then paint primer coat on cleaning activators
and dry it (usually 15 to 20 minutes).
(c) Wipe windshield rabbet of vehicle body with cotton yarn,
and clean it completely with cleaning agent and dry it
(usually 10 to 15 minutes), then paint the primer coat
and dry it (usually 15 to 20 minutes).
(d) Then smear glass cement along circumference of glass
evenly.
Attention: when smearing glass cement, no paraclase
shall exist at butt joint of glass cement.
(e) Affix rear windshield: first align reference column of rear
windshield with vehicle body hole, then affix rear
windshield on the rebbet, and adjust it by tapping on
surroundings of glass cement by hand to make it firm.
(f) Bind upper edge of rear windshield glass and vehicle body
together with scotch tape in order to avoid loose of glass.
Attention:
● Dip cloth in cleaning agent and use it to wipe off
redundant glass cement on vehicle body.
● Usually after 4 hours of placement in summer and
8 hours in winter shall the vehicle be put into
running.

3. Check for leakage and repair


(a) Perform leakage test.
(b) Seal leaking parts with glass cement.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-22 Vehicle body — Trunk rear panel assembly

Trunk rear panel assembly


Installation site of parts

Right connecting rod Outside handle assembly

Left connecting rod


Right hinge assembly of trunk back door Lock body assembly

Center hinge fixed Fixing bracket assembly of trunk


leaf assembly of check
trunk back door Lock catch assembly
of left lock

Center hinge fixed leaf of


trunk back door
Trunk check joint plate assembly
Inner plate closure plate
of trunk back plate

Left hinge assembly of trunk back door

N ·m : Specified torque

Dismount of trunk back door lock assembly


1. Remove 12 screws and take off inner plate closure plate
of trunk back plate
2. Separate left/right connecting rod from outside handle
3. Remove trunk back door lock assembly from trunk back
plate assembly
Remove 2 hexagon flange bolts and trunk back door lock
assembly

Installation of trunk back door lock assembly


1. Mount trunk back door lock assembly on trunk back plate
assembly
Install trunk back door lock assembly with 2 hexagon flange
bolts
2. Connect left/right rod and outside handle assembly
3. Install inner plate closure plate of trunk back plate
Install inner plate closure plate of trunk back plate with 12
extension buckles and screws

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body — Instrument panel B0-23

Instrument panel
Part drawing

Central mask left and right


ventilation port assembly Air bag cover plate

Central mask assembly

Instrument panel right ventilation port assembly

Upper cover plate of instrument panel


Instrument embellisher Instrument panel right side cover plate

Upper cover plate of instrument panel

Upper cover plate of


instrument panel
Instrument panel left
ventilation port assembly
Glove box lock cylinder assembly

Glove box assembly

Ashtray assembly

Instrument panel
Instrument panel left side cover plate

Transmission embellisher assembly

Left low plate assembly


Manual brake lever embellisher assembly

Fuse block cover block

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-24 Vehicle body — Instrument panel

Dismount of instrument panel


1. Disconnect battery cable from the cathode (-)
2. Dismount steering wheel
3. Dismount engine hood lock switch
Remove 2 screws and engine hood lock cable.
4. Dismount combination switch mask component
Remove the 3 screws.

5. Dismount manual brake lever embellisher assembly


Remove the 2 screws.
6. Dismount transmission embellisher assembly
Remove the 2 screws.

7. Dismount left low plate assembly


(a) Remove 1 screw and mask.
(b) Disconnect connectors.

8. Dismount instrument mask assembly


(a) Pull out instrument mask.
(b) Disconnect connectors

9. Dismount combined instrument


(a) Remove the 3 screws.
(b) Disconnect connectors.
(c) Dismount combined instrument.

10. Dismount ashtray

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body — Instrument panel B0-25

11. Dismount central mask assembly


(a) Pry out central mask with a screwdriver according to
the drawing and dismount it.
Attention: before screwdriver is used, its head must be
wrapped with tape.
(b) Disconnect connectors.

12. Dismount air conditioner panel


(a) Remove 2 screws and pull out air conditioner panel.
(b) Disconnect connectors.

13. Dismount CD and music center


(a) Remove the 4 screws.
(b) Disconnect wireless cable and connectors.
(c) Dismount CD and music center.

14. Dismount glove box assembly


Remove 2 screws and glove box assembly.
15. Dismount instrument panel
(a) Remove upper cover plates of instrument panel (3) and
left/right side cover plate of instrument panel.
(b) Remove 3 nuts and 2 bolts connecting instrument panel
and vehicle body.
(c) Remove 4 bolts connecting buttress brace of instrument
panel and vehicle body.
(d) Remove the combination of instrument panel and buttress
brace.
(e) Remove 4 fixed bolts of buttress brace of instrument
panel and instrument panel assembly.
(f) Remove tunnel and engine room wire harness.
(g) Remove instrument panel.
Installation of instrument panel
Install instrument panel parts according to reverse procedures
of dismount

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-26 Vehicle body — seat belt

seat belt
Part drawing

Front seat belt

50 ± 5

50 ± 5

50 ± 5

50 ± 5

Rear seat belt

50 ± 5
50 ± 5

50 ± 5

N ·m : Specified torque

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body — seat belt B0-27

Inspection of seat belt


Attention: seat b elt system must b e insp ected
systematically after each accident, and if the following
parts are found damaged, users must be informed to
replace seat belts. In case users refuse to replace
damaged seat belts, details must be recorded.
1. Inspect seat belt
2. Inspect inertia wheel (locking effect)
3. Visually inspect locking mechanism
4. Inspect functionality of seat belt locking mechanism
5. Inspect guiding mechanism of seat belt and dead bolt
6. Inspect fasteners and connecting points
7. Inspect spool of lap belt

Running test (in safe place)


1. Tighten front seat belt.
2. Run vehicles at 16 km/h and perform emergency stop.
3. Check seat belt is tightened and can not extend.
Remark: carry out this test in a safe place. If seat belt is not
tightened, dismount parts of seat belt mechanism and carry
out the following static test. In addition, whenever new seat
belt parts are installed, appropriate inspection shall be
performed before installation.

Static test
1 5° 1. Dismount locking retractor parts.

27
° 2. Slowly tilt the retractor.
3. Check the retraction of seat belt. Seat belt shall be able
to be pulled out when tilt angle is 12° or is below 15°; it
shall not be pulled out when tilt angle is over 27°.

Two point seat belt (manual)


Test
1. Adjust seat belt to appropriate length.
2. Apply stable load on seat belt.
3. Check seat belt which shall not extend at the moment.

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-28 Vehicle body — Seat

Seat
Part drawing

Front row seat

85 ± 5

85 ± 5

85 ± 5 85 ± 5

85 ± 5

85 ± 5

Rear row seat

85 ± 5

85 ± 5

85 ± 5

85 ± 5

N ·m : Specified torque

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body — Vehicle body dimension B0-29

Vehicle body dimension


Head light bed plate

(3D distance point dimension)

1051
A 1055 a
B 1045 b

Unit:mm

Symbol Description Diameter (mm ) Symbol Description Diam eter (m m)

A,a Installation hole of head light ¢7 B,b Installation hole of horn ¢9

Engine room

(3D distance point dimension)

A a

153 7
7 153
552
552

B b

Unit:mm

Symbol Description Diameter Symbol Description Diameter


(mm) (mm)
A,a Installation through hole of head light ¢13 B,b Installation through hole of hinge ¢13

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


B0-30 Vehicle body — Vehicle body dimension

Windshield opening

(3D distance point dimension)

a C
A

8
142
748.5

748.5
D
B b

Unit:mm

Symbol Description Diameter (mm) Symbol Description Diameter (mm)


A,a Technological cut of tonneau —— B,b Installation hole of wiper cover plate ¢8
Connecting part of tonneau/side Connecting part of front wall upper
C —— D ——
panel outer plate part/side panel outer plate

Side plate
(3D distance point dimension)

A
1074

119
7 E
718 G
1 22 8

B
6 86

946 D
C f

Unit:mm
Symbol Description Diameter (mm) Symbol Description Diameter (mm)
Installation through hole of
A ¢10 B Basic location hole ¢25
fender
C,D Technological cut —— E Basic location hole ¢36
Upper/lower cutting edge of back Corresponding point of rear
F,f —— G ——
door colum n outer plate

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn


Vehicle body — Vehicle body dimension B0-31

Engine room

(3D distance point dimension)

A a

308

308
298 C c 298 b
B

Unit:mm

Symbol Description Diameter (mm) Symbol Description Diameter (mm)

A Location hole of tonneau glass ¢6 B,b Corresponding point on rear panel ——

a Location hole of tonneau glass 6×8 slotted hole C,c Outer edge of rear panel ——

PDF 文件使用 "pdfFactory" 试用版本创建 www.fineprint.com.cn

You might also like